UCM630x Series - User Manual

Thank you for purchasing the Grandstream UCM630X series IP PBX appliance. The UCM6300 series allows businesses to build powerful and scalable unified communication and collaboration solutions. This series of IP PBXs provide a platform that unifies all business communication on one centralized network, including voice, video calling, video conferencing, video surveillance, web meetings, data, analytics, mobility, facility access, intercoms, and more. The UCM6300 series supports up to 3000 users and includes a built-in web meetings and video conferencing solution that allows employees to connect from the desktop, mobile, GVC series devices, and IP phones. It can be paired with the UCM6300 ecosystem to offer a hybrid platform that combines the control of an on-premises IP PBX with the remote access of a cloud solution. The UCM6300 ecosystem consists of the Wave app for desktop and mobile, which provides a hub for collaborating remotely, and UCM RemoteConnect, a cloud NAT traversal service for ensuring secure remote connections. The UCM6300 series also offers cloud setup and management through GDMS and an API for integration with third-party platforms. By offering a high-end unified communications and collaboration solution packed with a suite of mobility, security, meeting, and collaboration tools, the UCM6300 series provides a powerful platform for any organization.

PRODUCT OVERVIEW

Technical Specifications

The following table resumes all the technical specifications including the protocols/standards supported, voice codecs, telephony features, languages, and upgrade/provisioning settings for the UCM630X series.

Technical Specifications

INSTALLATION

Before deploying and configuring the UCM630X series, the device needs to be properly powered up and connected to a network. This section describes detailed information on the installation, connection, and warranty policy of the UCM630X series.

Equipment Packaging

Main Case	1
Power Adaptor	1
Ethernet Cable	1
Quick Installation Guide	1

Connect Your UCM630X (UCM6301 as an example)

To set up the UCM6301, follow the steps below:

1. Connect one end of an RJ-45 Ethernet cable into the WAN port of the UCM6301.
2. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable into the uplink port of an Ethernet switch/hub.
3. Connect the 12V DC power adapter into the 12V DC power jack on the back of the UCM6301. Insert the main plug of the power adapter into a surge-protected power outlet.
4. Wait for the UCM6301 to boot up. The LCD in the front will show the device hardware information when the boot process is done.
5. Once the UCM6301 is successfully connected to the network, press the Home button to display the IP address.
6. (Optional) Connect PSTN lines from the wall jack to the FXO ports; connect analog lines (phone and Fax) to the FXS ports.

UCM6302 front and back view

UCM6304 front and back view

UCM6308 front and back view

GETTING STARTED

To get started with the UCM630X setup process, use the following available interfaces: LCD display, and web portal.

• The LCD display shows hardware, software, interface status, and network information and can be navigated via the Slide control and Touch keys. From here, users can configure basic network settings, run diagnostic tests, and factory reset.
• The web portal (may also be referred to as web UI in this guide) is the primary method of configuring the UCM.

This section will provide step-by-step instructions on how to use these interfaces to quickly set up the UCM and start making and receiving calls with it.

Use the LCD Menu

• Idle Screen

Once the device has booted up completely, the LCD will show the UCM model, hardware version, and IP address. Upon menu key press timeout (30 seconds), the screen will default back to this information.

• Menu

Pressing the Home button will show the main menu. All available menu options are found in [LCD Menu Options].

• Menu Navigation

Scrolling down using slide control through the menu options. Press the OK button to select an option.

• Exit

Selecting the Back option will return to the previous menu. For the Device Info, Network Info, and Web Info screens that have no Back option, pressing the OK button will return to the previous menu.

• LCD Backlight

The LCD backlight will turn on upon button press and will go off when idle for 30 seconds.

The following table summarizes the layout of the LCD menu of UCM630x.

Use the LED Indicators

The UCM6301/6302 has LED indicators on the network port to display connection status and the following picture shows the other ports’ status.

The UCM6304/6308 has LED indicators in the front to display the connection status. The following table shows the status definitions.

LED Indicator	LED Status
Power 1/Power 2 PoE LAN WAN USB SD FXS ports FXO ports	Solid: Connected Fast Blinking: Data Transferring Slow Blinking: Trying to connect OFF: Not Connected

Using the Web UI

Accessing the Web UI

The UCM’s web server responds to HTTP/HTTPS GET/POST requests. Embedded HTML pages allow users to configure the device through a web browser such as Microsoft IE (version 8+), Mozilla Firefox, Google Chrome, etc. To access the UCM’s web portal, follow the steps below:

1. Make sure your computer is on the same network as the UCM.
2. Make sure that the UCM’s IP address is displayed on its LCD.
3. Enter the UCM’s IP address into a web browsers’ address bar. The login page should appear (please see the above image).
4. Enter default administrator username “admin” and password can be found on the sticker at the back of the UCM.

Setup Wizard

When you log in to the UCM Web GUI interface for the first time, the system will automatically start the setup wizard and expand the description of the instant messaging soft terminal supporting system ( Wave). Click “Learn more” to open the Wave client download interface.

The setup wizard guides users to complete basic configuration, such as administrator password modification, network settings, time zone settings, extension settings, and routing rule configuration, etc.

The setup wizard can be closed and reopened at any time. At the end of the wizard, a summary of the pending configuration changes can be reviewed before applying them.

Main Settings

There are 12 main sections in the web portal to manage various features of the UCM.

• System Status: Displays the dashboard, system information, current active calls, and network status.
• Extensions/Trunks: Manages extensions, trunks, and routing rules.
• Call Features: Manages various features of the UCM such as the IVR and voicemail.
• Messaging: In this section the main settings for the methods of messaging which are offered by the UCM.
• PBX Settings: Manages the settings related to PBX functionality such as SIP settings and interface settings.
• System Settings: Manages the settings related to the UCM system itself such as network and security settings.
• Contacts: Manages all the type of contacts and departments in the UCM.
• Device Management: Manages cameras and Grandstream provisioning mechanism Zero Config.
• Maintenance: Manages settings and logs related to system management and maintenance such as
• user management, activity logs, backup settings, upgrade settings, and troubleshooting tools.
• CDR: Contains the call detail records, statistics, and audio recordings of calls processed by the UCM.
• RemoteConnect: the user can view the RemoteConnect purchased for the UCM. The user can also configure related settings from this section.
• Integrations: Manages the settings of features unrelated to core PBX functionality such as CRM/PMS integrations.

Web GUI Languages

Currently the UCM630X series Web GUI supports English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Spanish, French, Portuguese, Russian, Italian, Polish, German, Turkish, and Czech.

Users can select the UCM’s web UI display language in the top-right corner of the page.

Web GUI Search Bar

Users can search for options in the web portal with the search bar on the top right of the page.

Saving and Applying Changes

After making changes to a page, click on the “Save” button to save them and then the “Apply Changes” button that finalizes the changes. If a modification requires a reboot, a prompt will appear asking to reboot the device.

Setting Up an Extension

Power on the UCM630X and your SIP endpoint. Connect both devices to the same network and follow the steps below to set up an extension.

1. Log into the UCM web portal and navigate to Extension/Trunk🡪Extensions
2. Click on the “Add” button to start creating a new extension. The Extension and SIP/IAX Password information will be used to register this extension. To set up voicemail, the Voicemail Password will be required.
3. To register an endpoint to this extension, go into your endpoint’s web UI and edit the desired account. Enter the newly created extension’s number, SIP user ID, and password into their corresponding fields on the endpoint. Enter the UCM’s IP address into the SIP server field. If setting up voicemail, enter *97 into the Voice Mail Access Number field. This field may be named differently on other devices.
4. To access the extension’s voicemail, use the newly registered extension to dial *97 and access the personal voicemail system. Once prompted, enter the voicemail password. If successful, you will now be prompted with various voicemail options.
5. You have now set up an extension on an endpoint.

SYSTEM SETTINGS

This section will explain the available system-wide parameters and configuration options on the UCM630X series. This includes settings for the following items: General Settings, Cloud IM, HTTP server, network Settings, OpenVPN, DDNS Settings, Security Settings, LDAP server, Time settings, Email settings, and TR-069.

General Settings

System administrators can prevent the UCM from making calls and/or writing to the data partition (e.g., CDR, recordings, etc.) once the system reaches a specified threshold of storage usage and CPU usage respectively. These options are located in the System Settings 🡪 General Settings page.

General Settings
Device Name	Configure the name of the UCM.
Enable CPU Flow Control	Enables the CPU flow control.
CPU Flow Control Threshold	Used to set the threshold generated by the CPU Flow Control. When the system CPU reaches the threshold, it will prohibit the new calls. The default value is 90%.
Data Partition Write Threshold	Used to set a threshold to stop writing data partition. When the disk data partition reaches the threshold configured, the data partition writing will be stopped. The default value is 90%.

IM Settings

IM Settings

In IM Settings tab, the user can choose to enable or disable read receipts when exchanging messaging using Wave.

Cloud IM Service

After enabling Cloud IM, it means that all IM data in Wave is stored in the external server Cloud IM, and is no longer stored locally in UCM.GDMS can configure the External Cloud IM service for UCM devices. At this time, the UCM device synchronizes the configuration item information.

IM Server

If Enable IM Server Mode is toggled on, UCM will function only as an IM server. The UCM management portal will remove PBX-related services and supports the binding of multiple cross-region UCM devices. The UCM device that wants to bind the IM server address is also bound by turning on the Cloud IM mode, and the IM data in his Wave is stored in this IM server.

HTTP Server

The UCM630X’s embedded web server responds to HTTPS GET/POST requests and allows users to configure the UCM via web browsers such as Microsoft IE, Mozilla Firefox, and Google Chrome. By default, users can access the UCM by just typing its IP address into a browser address bar. The browser will automatically be redirected to HTTPS using port 8089. For example, typing in “192.168.40.50” into the address bar will redirect the browser to “https://192.168.40.50:8089”. This behavior can be changed in the System Settings🡪HTTP Server page.

If the protocol or port has been changed, the user will be logged out and redirected to the new URL.

Network Settings

After successfully connecting the UCM630X to the network for the first time, users could log in to the Web GUI and go to System Settings🡪Network Settings to configure the network parameters for the device.

• UCM630X supports Route/Switch/Dual mode functions.

In this section, all the available network setting options are listed for all models. Select each tab in Web GUI🡪System Settings🡪Network Settings page to configure LAN settings, WAN settings, 802.1X, and Port Forwarding.

Basic Settings

Please refer to the following tables for basic network configuration parameters on UCM6301, UCM6302, UCM6304, and UCM6308, respectively.

• Method: Route

When the UCM630X has the method set to Route in network settings, WAN port interface is used for uplink connection and LAN port interface is used as a router. Please see a sample diagram below.

• Method: Switch

WAN port interface is used for uplink connection; LAN port interface is used as a room for PC connection.

• Method: Dual

Both WAN port and LAN port are used for the uplink connection. Users will need to assign LAN 1 or LAN 2 as the default interface in option “Default Interface” and configure “Gateway IP” if static IP is used for this interface.

802.1X

IEEE 802.1X is an IEEE standard for port-based network access control. It provides an authentication mechanism to a device before the device can access the Internet or other LAN resources. The UCM630X supports 802.1X as a supplicant/client to be authenticated.

The following diagram and figure show UCM630X uses 802.1X mode “EAP-MD5” on the WAN port as a client in the network to access the Internet.

The following table shows the configuration parameters for 802.1X on UCM630X. Identity and MD5 password are required for authentication, which should be provided by the network administrator obtained from the RADIUS server. If “EAP-TLS” or “EAP-PEAPv0/MSCHAPv2” is used, users will also need to upload 802.1X CA Certificate and 802.1X Client Certificate, which should be also generated from the RADIUS server.

802.1X Mode	Select 802.1X mode. The default setting is “Disable”. The supported 802.1X modes are: EAP-MD5 EAP-TLS EAP-PEAPv0/MSCHAPv2
Identity	Enter 802.1X mode Identity information.
MD5 Password	Enter 802.1X mode MD5 password information.
802.1X CA Certificate	Select 802.1X certificate from local PC and then upload.
802.1X Client Certificate	Select 802.1X client certificate from local PC and then upload.

Static Routes

The UCM630X provides users static routing capability that allows the device to use manually configured routes, rather than information only from dynamic routing or gateway configured in the UCM630X Web GUI🡪System Settings🡪Network Settings🡪Basic Settings to forward traffic. It can be used to define a route when no other routes are available or necessary or used in complementary with existing routing on the UCM630X as a failover backup, etc.

• Click on “Add IPv4 Static Route” to create a new IPv4 static route or click ”Add IPv6 Static Route” to create a new IPv6 static route. The configuration parameters are listed in the table below.
• Once added, users can select to edit the static route.
• Select to delete the static route.

Destination	Configure the destination IPv4 address or the destination IPv6 subnet for the UCM630X to reach using the static route. Example: IPv4 address – 192.168.66.4 IPv6 subnet – 2001:740:D::1/64
Subnet Mask	Configure the subnet mask for the above destination address. If left blank, the default value is 255.255.255.255. Example: 255.255.255.0
Gateway	Configure the IPv4 or IPv6 gateway address so that the UCM630X can reach the destination via this gateway. The gateway address is optional. Example: 192.168.40.5 or 2001:740:D::1
Interface	Specify the network interface on the UCM630X to reach the destination using the static route. LAN interface is eth0; WAN interface is eth1.

Static routes configuration can be reset from the LCD menu🡪Network Menu.

The following diagram shows a sample application of static route usage on UCM6304.

The network topology of the above diagram is as below:

• Network 192.168.69.0 has IP phones registered to UCM6304 LAN 1 address
• Network 192.168.40.0 has IP phones registered to UCM6304 LAN 2 address
• Network 192.168.66.0 has IP phones registered to UCM6304 via VPN
• Network 192.168.40.0 has a VPN connection established with network 192.168.66.0

In this network, by default, the IP phones in network 192.168.69.0 are unable to call IP phones in network 192.168.66.0 when registered on different interfaces on the UCM6304. Therefore, we need to configure a static route on the UCM6304 so that the phones in isolated networks can make calls between each other.

Port Forwarding

The UCM network interface supports the router function which provides users the ability to do port forwarding. If LAN mode is set to “Route” under Web GUI🡪System Settings🡪Network Settings🡪Basic Settings page, port forwarding is available for configuration.

The port forwarding configuration is under Web GUI🡪System Settings🡪Network Settings🡪Port Forwarding page. Please see related settings in the table below.

UCM630X Network Settings🡪Port Forwarding

The following figures demonstrate a port forwarding example to provide a phone’s Web GUI access to the public side.

• UCM630X network mode is set to “Route”.
• UCM630X WAN port is connected to the uplink switch, with a public IP address configured, e.g. 1.1.1.1.
• UCM630X LAN port provides a DHCP pool that connects to multiple phone devices in the LAN network 192.168.2.x. The UCM60X is used as a router, with gateway address 192.168.2.1.
• There is a GXP2160 connected under the LAN interface network of the UCM630X. It obtains IP address 192.168.2.100 from the UCM630X DHCP pool.
• On the UCM630X Web GUI🡪System Settings🡪Network Settings🡪Port Forwarding, configure a port forwarding entry as the figure shows below.

• WAN Port: This is the port opened on the WAN side for access purposes.
• LAN IP: This is the GXP2160 IP address, under the LAN interface network of the UCM630X.
• LAN Port: This is the port opened on the GXP2160 side for access purposes.
• Protocol Type: We select TCP here for Web GUI access using HTTP.

This will allow users to access the GXP2160 Web GUI from the public side, by typing in the public IP address (example: 1.1.1.1:8088).

ARP Settings

The ARP settings can be configured under Web GUI🡪System Settings🡪Network Settings🡪ARP Settings

ARP GC Threshold 1	A minimum number of entries to keep. The garbage collector will not purge entries if there are fewer than this number. The default value is 128.
ARP GC Threshold 2	Threshold when garbage collector becomes more aggressive about purging entries. Entries older than 5 seconds will be cleared when over this number. The default value is 512.
ARP GC Threshold 3	The maximum number of non-PERMANENT neighbor entries allowed. Increase this when using large numbers of interfaces and when communicating with large numbers of directly connected peers. The default value is 1024.

OpenVPN®

OpenVPN® settings allow the users to configure UCM630X to use VPN features, the following table gives details about the various options to configure the UCM as OpenVPN Client.

DDNS Settings

DDNS setting allows users to access UCM630X via domain name instead of IP address.

The UCM supports DDNS service from the following DDNS provider:

• dydns.org
• noip.com
• freedns.afraid.org
• zoneedit.com
• oray.net

Here is an example of using noip.com for DDNS.

1. Register domain in DDNS service provider. Please note the UCM630X needs to have public IP access.

2. On Web GUI🡪System Settings🡪Network Settings🡪DDNS Settings, enable DDNS service and configure username, password, and host name.

3. Now you can use a domain name instead of an IP address to connect to the UCM630X Web GUI.

Security Settings

The UCM630X provides users firewall security configurations to prevent certain malicious attacks to the UCM630X system. Users could configure to allow, restrict, or reject specific traffic through the device for security and bandwidth purpose. The UCM630X also provides the Fail2ban feature for authentication errors in SIP REGISTER, INVITE and SUBSCRIBE. To configure firewall settings in the UCM630X, go to Web GUI🡪System Settings🡪Security Settings page.

Static Defense

Under Web GUI🡪System Settings🡪Security Settings🡪Static Defense page, users will see the following information:

• Current service information with port, process, and type.
• Typical firewall settings.
• Custom firewall settings.

The following table shows a sample current service status running on the UCM630X.

Port	Process	Type	Protocol or Service
7777	Asterisk	TCP/IPv4	SIP
389	Slapd	TCP/IPv4	LDAP
6060	zero_config	UDP/IPv4	UCM630X zero_config service
5060	Asterisk	UDP/IPv4	SIP
4569	Asterisk	UDP/IPv4	SIP
38563	Asterisk	udp/ipv4	SIP
10000	gs_avs	udp/ipv4	gs_avs
10001	gs_avs	udp/ipv4	gs_avs
10002	gs_avs	udp/ipv4	gs_avs
10003	gs_avs	udp/ipv4	gs_avs
10004	gs_avs	udp/ipv4	gs_avs
10005	gs_avs	udp/ipv4	gs_avs
10006	gs_avs	udp/ipv4	gs_avs
10007	gs_avs	udp/ipv4	gs_avs
10010	gs_avs	udp/ipv4	gs_avs
10012	gs_avs	udp/ipv4	gs_avs
10013	gs_avs	udp/ipv4	gs_avs
10014	gs_avs	udp/ipv4	gs_avs
10015	gs_avs	udp/ipv4	gs_avs
10018	gs_avs	udp/ipv4	gs_avs
10019	gs_avs	udp/ipv4	gs_avs
10020	gs_avs	udp/ipv4	gs_avs
6066	Python	udp/ipv4	python
3306	Mysqld	tcp/ipv4	mysqld
45678	Python	udp/ipv4	python
8439	Lighttpd	tcp/ipv4	HTTP
8088	asterisk	tcp/ipv4	SIP
8888	Pbxmid	tcp/ipv4	pbxmid
25	Master	tcp/ipv4	master
636	Slapd	tcp/ipv4	SLDAP
4569	asterisk	udp/ipv6	SIP
42050	asterisk	udp/ipv6	SIP
7681	Pbxmid	tcp/ipv4	pbxmid

For typical firewall settings, users could configure the following options on the UCM630X.

Ping Defense Enable	If enabled, ICMP response will not be allowed for Ping requests. The default setting is disabled. To enable or disable it, click on the check box for the LAN or WAN (UCM630X) interface.
SYN-Flood Defense Enable	Allows the UCM630X to handle excessive amounts of SYN packets from one source and keep the web portal accessible. There are two options available and only one of these options may be enabled at one time. eth(0)LAN defends against attacks directed to the LAN IP address of the UCM630X. eth(1)WAN defends against attacks directed to the WAN IP address of the UCM630X. SYN Flood Defense will limit the amount of SYN packets accepted by the UCM from one source to 10 packets per second. Any excess packets from that source will be discarded.
Ping-of-Death Defense Enable	Enable to prevent Ping-of-Death attack to the device. The default setting is disabled. To enable or disable it, click on the check box for the LAN or WAN (UCM630X) interface.

Under “Custom Firewall Settings”, users could create new rules to accept, reject or drop certain traffic going through the UCM630X. To create a new rule, click on the “Create New Rule” button and a new window will pop up for users to specify rule options.

Right next to the “Create New Rule” button, there is a checkbox for the option “Reject Rules”. If it is checked, all the rules will be rejected except the firewall rules listed below. In the firewall rules, only when there is a rule that meets all the following requirements, the option “Reject Rules” will be allowed to check:

• Action: “Accept”
• Type “In”
• The destination port is set to the system login port (e.g., by default 8089)
• The protocol is not UDP

Rule Name	Specify the Firewall rule name to identify the firewall rule.
Action	Select the action for the Firewall to perform. ACCEPT REJECT DROP
Type	Select the traffic type. IN If selected, users will need to specify the network interface “LAN” or “WAN” (for UCM630X) for the incoming traffic. OUT
Interface	Select the interface to use the Firewall rule.
Service	Select the service type. FTP SSH Telnet HTTP LDAP Custom If “Custom” is selected, users will need to specify Source (IP and port), Destination (IP and port), and Protocol (TCP, UDP, or Both) for the service. Please note if the source or the destination field is left blank, it will be used as “Anywhere”.
Source IP Address and Port	Configure a source subnet and port. If set to “Anywhere” or left empty, traffic from all addresses and ports will be accepted. A single port or a range of ports can be specified (e.g., 10000, 10000-20000).
Destination IP Address and Port	Configure a destination subnet and port. If set to “Anywhere” or left empty, traffic can be sent to all addresses and ports. A single port or a range of ports can be specified (e.g., 10000, 10000-20000).
Protocol	Select the protocol for the rule to be used.

Save the change and click on the “Apply” button. Then submit the configuration by clicking on “Apply Changes” on the upper right of the web page. The new rule will be listed at the bottom of the page with sequence number, rule name, action, protocol, type, source, destination, and operation. More operations are below:

• Click on to edit the rule.
• Click on to delete the rule.

Dynamic Defense

Dynamic defense is supported on the UCM630X series. It can blacklist hosts dynamically when the LAN mode is set to “Route” under Web GUI🡪System Settings🡪Network Settings🡪Basic Settings page. If enabled, the traffic coming into the UCM630X can be monitored, which helps prevent massive connection attempts or brute force attacks to the device. The blacklist can be created and updated by the UCM630X firewall, which will then be displayed on the web page. Please refer to the following table for dynamic defense options on the UCM630X.

Dynamic Defense Enable	Enable dynamic defense. The default setting is disabled.
Blacklist Update Interval	Configure the blacklist update time interval (in seconds). The default setting is 120.
Connection Threshold	Configure the connection threshold. Once the number of connections from the same host reaches the threshold, it will be added to the blacklist. The default setting is 100.
Dynamic Defense Whitelist	Allowed IPs and ports range, multiple IP addresses, and port range. For example: 192.168.2.100-192.168.2.105, 1000:9999

The following figure shows a configuration example like this:

• If a host at IP address 192.168.5.7 initiates more than 20 TCP connections to the UCM630X it will be added to the UCM630X blacklist.
• This host 192.168.5.7 will be blocked by the UCM630X for 500 seconds.
• Since IP range 192.168.5.100-192.168.5.200 is in the whitelist if a host initiates more than 20 TCP connections to the UCM630X it will not be added to the UCM630X blacklist. It can still establish a TCP connection with the UCM630X.

Fail2ban

Fail2Ban feature on the UCM630X provides intrusion detection and prevention for authentication errors in SIP REGISTER, INVITE and SUBSCRIBE. Once the entry is detected within “Max Retry Duration”, the UCM630X will act to forbid the host for a certain period as defined in “Banned Duration”. This feature helps prevent SIP brute force attacks on the PBX system.

SSH Access

SSH switch now is available via Web GUI and LCD. Users can enable or disable SSH access directly from Web GUI or LCD screen. For web SSH access, please log in to UCM630X web interface and go to Web GUI🡪System Settings🡪Security Settings🡪SSH Access.

The “Enable SSH access” option is for system debugging. If you enable this option, the system will allow SSH access. The SSH connection require using the username “admin” and the super administrator’s password. This option is turned off by default. It is recommended to turn off this option when debugging is not required.

Tick “Enable remote SSH” option, the system will allow remote SSH access via the GDMS platform. This option is turned off by default, and it is strongly recommended to turn off this option when remote troubleshooting is not required.

LDAP Server

The UCM630X has an embedded LDAP/LDAPS server for users to manage the corporate phonebook in a centralized manner.

• By default, the LDAP server has generated the first phonebook with PBX DN “ou=pbx,dc=pbx,dc=com” based on the UCM630X user extensions already.
• Users could add new phonebook with a different Phonebook DN for other external contacts. For example, “ou=people,dc=pbx,dc=com”.
• All the phonebooks in the UCM630X LDAP server have the same Base DN “dc=pbx,dc=com”.

Term Explanation:

cn= Common Name

ou= Organization Unit

dc= Domain Component

These are all parts of the LDAP Data Interchange Format, according to RFC 2849, which is how the LDAP tree is filtered.

If users have the Grandstream phone provisioned by the UCM630X, the LDAP directory will be set up on the phone and can be used right away for users to access all phonebooks.

Additionally, users could manually configure the LDAP client settings to manipulate the built-in LDAP server on the UCM630X. If the UCM630X has multiple LDAP phonebooks created, in the LDAP client configuration, users could use “dc=pbx,dc=com” as Base DN to have access to all phonebooks on the UCM630X LDAP server, or use a specific phonebook DN, for example “ou=people,dc=pbx,dc=com”, to access to phonebook with Phonebook DN “ou=people,dc=pbx,dc=com ” only.

UCM can also act as an LDAP client to download phonebook entries from another LDAP server.

To access the LDAP server and client settings, go to Web GUI🡪Settings🡪LDAP Server.

LDAP Server Configurations

The following figure shows the default LDAP server configurations on the UCM630X.

The UCM630X LDAP server supports anonymous access (read-only) by default. Therefore, the LDAP client does not have to configure a username and password to access the phonebook directory. The “Root DN” and “Root Password” here are for LDAP management and configuration where users will need to provide for authentication purposes before modifying the LDAP information.

The default phonebook list in this LDAP server can be viewed and edited by clicking on/for the first phonebook under LDAP Phonebook.

The UCM630X support secure LDAP (LDAPS) where the communication is encrypted and secure.

LDAP Phonebook

Users could use the default phonebook, edit the default phonebook, add new phonebook, import phonebook on the LDAP server as well as export phonebook from the LDAP server. The first phonebook with default phonebook dn “ou=pbx,dc=pbx,dc=com” displayed on the LDAP server page is for extensions in this PBX. Users cannot add or delete contacts directly. The contacts information will need to be modified via Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Extensions first. The default LDAP phonebook will then be updated automatically.

• Add new phonebook

A new sibling phonebook of the default PBX phonebook can be added by clicking on “Add” under “LDAP Phonebook” section.

Configure the “Phonebook Prefix” first. The “Phonebook DN” will be automatically filled in. For example, if configuring “Phonebook Prefix” as “people”, the “Phonebook DN” will be filled with “ou=people,dc=pbx,dc=com”.

Once added, users can select to edit the phonebook attributes and contact list (see figure below) or select to delete the phonebook.

• Import phonebook from your computer to LDAP server

Click on “Import Phonebook” and a dialog will prompt as shown in the figure below.

The file to be imported must be a CSV, VCF or XML file with UTF-8 encoding. Users can open the file with Notepad and save it with UTF-8 encoding.

Here is how a sample file looks like. Please note “Account Number” and “Phonebook DN” fields are required. Users could export a phonebook file from the UCM630X LDAP phonebook section first and use it as a sample to start with.

The Phonebook DN field is the same “Phonebook Prefix” entry as when the user clicks on “Add” to create a new phonebook. Therefore, if the user enters “phonebook” in “Phonebook DN” field in the CSV file, the actual phonebook DN “ou=phonebook,dc=pbx,dc=com” will be automatically created by the UCM630X once the CSV file is imported.

In the CSV file, users can specify different phonebook DN fields for different contacts. If the phonebook DN already exists on the UCM630X LDAP Phonebook, the contacts in the CSV file will be added into the existing phonebook. If the phonebook DN does not exist on the UCM630X LDAP Phonebook, a new phonebook with this phonebook DN will be created.

The sample phonebook CSV file in above picture will result in the following LDAP phonebook in the UCM630X.

As the default LDAP phonebook with DN “ou=pbx,dc=pbx,dc=com” cannot be edited or deleted in LDAP phonebook section, users cannot import contacts with Phonebook DN field “pbx” if existed in the CSV file.

• Export phonebook to your computer from UCM630X LDAP server

Select the checkbox for the LDAP phonebook and then click on “Export Selected Phonebook” to export the selected phonebook. The exported phonebook can be used as a record or a sample CSV, VFC or XML file for the users to add more contacts in it and import to the UCM630X again.

LDAP Settings

Prerequisites to support contacts sync-up to IP Phones, UCM needs to support the following:

1.         If Cloud IM is enabled, UCM can send remote UCM’s contacts to each end device.

2.         Contacts from remote UCM can be synced by Cloud IM or LDAP sync via trunk. The contacts data must be complete and consistent.

3.         If Cloud IM is enabled, the contacts sent from UCM to end device should integrate Cloud IM contacts.

4.         If Cloud IM is disabled, the contacts sent from UCM to end device should only contain contacts on the UCM.

To support contacts sync-up to Wave, it allows Wave to obtain enterprise contacts from Cloud IM or LDAP. On UCM SIP peer trunk, if LDAP sync is enabled, end point can obtain remote UCM extensions’ info via LDAP. Also, it will allow configuring whether to sync up LDAP contacts on Wave so that Wave doesn’t receive duplicate contacts info.

Under UCM webUI🡪 System Settings🡪 LDAP Server, click on “LDAP Settings”, option “Wave enable LDAP phonebook” is available for configuration. If enabled, all Wave users on this UCM will display LDAP contacts. Otherwise, it will not display.

Please note the LDAP contacts displayed on Wave will exclude the duplicate contacts from Cloud IM.

LDAP Client Configurations

The configuration on LDAP client is useful when you use other LDAP servers. Here we provide an example on how to configure the LDAP client on the UCM.

Assuming the remote server base dn is “dc=pbx,dc=com”, configure the LDAP client as follows:

LDAP Client Type

The UCM can automatically update the phonebook, by configuring the ‘LDAP Automatic Update Cycle’. Available options are: 1 day/2days/7 days. It is set to ‘None’ by default.

The following figure gives a sample configuration for UCM acting as a LDAP client.

To configure Grandstream IP phones as the LDAP clients for UCM, please refer to the following example:

• Server Address: The IP address or domain name of the UCM
• Base DN: dc=pbx,dc=com
• Username: cn=admin,dc=pbx,dc=com
• Password: admin (by default)
• LDAP Name Attribute: CallerIDName Email Department FirstName LastName
• LDAP Number Attribute: AccountNumber MobileNumber HomeNumber Fax
• LDAP Number Filter: (AccountNumber=%)
• LDAP Name Filter: (CallerIDName=%)
• LDAP Display Name: AccountNumber CallerIDName
• LDAP Version: If existed, please select LDAP Version 3
• Port: 389

The following figure shows the configuration information on a Grandstream GXP2170 to successfully use the LDAP server as configured in [LDAP Server Configurations].

AD Client Type

Time Settings

Automatic Date and Time

The current system time on the UCM630X can be found under Web GUI🡪System Status🡪Dashboard🡪PBX Status.

To configure the UCM630X to update time automatically, go to Web GUI🡪System Settings🡪Time Settings🡪Automatic date and Time.

Set Date and Time

To manually set the time on the UCM630X, go to Web GUI🡪System Settings🡪Time Settings🡪Set Date and Time. The format is YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS.

NTP Server

The UCM630X can be used as an NTP server for the NTP clients to synchronize their time with. To configure the UCM630X as the NTP server, set “Enable NTP server” to “Yes” under Web GUI🡪System Settings🡪Time Settings🡪NTP Server. On the client side, point the NTP server address to the UCM630X IP address or host name to use the UCM630X as the NTP server.

Office Time

On the UCM630x, the system administrator can define “office time” which can be used to configure time condition for extension call forwarding and inbound rules. To configure office time, log in to the Web GUI, enter the System Settings🡪Time Settings🡪Office Time, and click the “Add” button to see the following configuration page.

Start Time	Configure the start time for office hour.
End Time	Configure the end time for office hour
Week	Select the workdays in one week.
Show Advanced Options	Check this option to show advanced options. Once selected, please specify “Month” and “Day” below.
Month	Select the months for office time.
Day	Select the workdays in one month.

Select “Start Time”, “End Time” and the day for the “Week” for the office time. The system administrator can also define month and day of the month as advanced options. Once done, click on “Save” and then “Apply Change” for the office time to take effect. The office time will be listed in the web page as the figure shows below.

• Click on to edit the office time.
• Click on to delete the office time.
• Click on “Delete” to delete multiple selected office times at once.

Holiday

On UCM, the system administrator can define “holidays” which can be used to configure time condition for extension call forwarding and inbound rules. To configure office time, log in to the Web GUI, enter the System Settings🡪Time Settings🡪Holiday, and click the “Add” button to see the following configuration page.

Enter holiday “Name” and “Holiday Memo” for the new holiday. Then select “Month”, “Day” and the exact “Hour”. The system administrator can also define days in one week as advanced options. Once done, click on “Save” and then “Apply Change” for the holiday to take effect. The holiday will be listed in the web page as the figure shows.

• Click on to edit the holiday.
• Click on to delete the holiday.
• Click on “Delete” to delete multiple selected holidays at once.

Email Settings

Email Settings

The Email application on the UCM630X can be used to send out alert event Emails, Voicemail (Voicemail-To-Email) etc. The configuration parameters can be accessed via Web GUI🡪System Settings🡪Email Settings🡪Email Settings.

TLS Enable	Enable or disable TLS during transferring/submitting your Email to another SMTP server. The default setting is “Yes”.
Type	Select Email type. MTA: Mail Transfer Agent. The Email will be sent from the configured domain. When MTA is selected, there is no need to set up SMTP server for it or no user login is required. However, the Emails sent from MTA might be considered as spam by the target SMTP server. Client: Submit Emails to the SMTP server. A SMTP server is required, and users need login with correct credentials.
Domain	Specify the domain name to be used in the Email when using type “MTA”.
SMTP Server	Specify the SMTP server when using type “Client”.
Enable SASL Authentication	Enable SASL Authentication. When disabled, UCM will not try to use the username and password for mail client login authentication. Most of the mail server requires login authentication while some others private mail servers allow anonymous login which requires disabling this option to send Email as normal. For Exchange Server, please disable this option.
Username	Username is required when using type “Client”. Normally it is the Email address.
Password	Password to login for the above Username (Email address) is required when using type “Client”.
Enable Email-to-Fax	Monitors the inbox of the configured email address for the specified subject. If enabled, the UCM will get a copy of the attachment from the email and send it to the XXX extension by fax. The attachment must be in PDF/TIF/TIFF format.
Email-to-Fax Blacklist/Whitelist	The user can enable the Email-to-Fax Blacklist or Email-to-Fax Whitelist.
Email-to-Fax Subject Format	Select the email subject format to use for emails to fax. XXX refers to the extension that the fax will be sent to. This extension can only contain numbers.
Internal Black/Whitelist	Email address blacklist/whitelist for local extensions.
External Blacklist/Whitelist	Email address blacklist/whitelist for non-local contacts. Separate multiple addresses with semicolon (;) (i.e.”xxx;yyy”).
Fax Sending Success/Failure Confirmation	If enabled, the UCM will send an email notification to the sender about the fax sending result.
POP/POP3 Server Address	Configure the POP/POP3 server address for the configured username Example: pop.gmail.com
POP/POP3 Server Port	Configure the POP/POP3 server port for the configured username Example: 995
Display Name	Specify the display name in the FROM header in the Email.
Sender	Specify the sender’s Email address. For example: pbx@example.mycompany.com.

The following figure shows a sample Email setting on the UCM630X, assuming the Email is using 192.168.6.202 as the SMTP server.

Once the configuration is finished, click on “Test”. In the prompt, fill in a valid Email address to send a test email to verify the Email settings on the UCM630X.

Email Templates

The Email templates on the UCM630X can be used for email notification, the configuration parameters can be accessed via Web GUI🡪Settings🡪Email Settings🡪Email Templates.

Users can customize email templates for password reset, voicemail, meeting scheduling, extensions, fax, meeting report, PMS, CDR, emergency call, missed calls, alert events, call queue statistics and etc.

• Click on icon to edit the template.

• Added “Edge” and “Safari” as supported browser.
• Added “Download Wave” button for user to download Wave app from: https://fw.gdms.cloud/wave/download/
• Improved descriptions

Email Footer Hyperlink

Under UCM Web GUI🡪System Settings🡪Email Settings🡪Email Footer Hyperlink, users could edit the text and URL to modify the email footer hyperlink.

Email Send Log

Under UCM Web GUI🡪System Settings🡪Email Settings🡪Email Send Log, users could search, filter, and check whether the Email is sent out successfully or not. This page will also display the corresponding error message if the Email is not sent out successfully.

Email Log – Display Filter

Email logs will be shown at bottom of the “Email Send Log” page, as shown in the following figure.

Below are the codes returned when sending emails and their description:

Email Codes

Code	Description
250	Mail sent successfully
501	Address format parsing error, 501 will be returned when there are unacceptable characters in the recipient’s email address in MTA mode. Please check if the recipient’s email address format is correct. The “sender” configured on the client is your mail account.
535	The username and password verification in the client mode is incorrect. Please check whether the username and password are configured correctly.
550	Possible reasons: 1. The recipient’s mailbox username does not exist or is in a banned state, please check whether the email recipient is the correct email address. 2. The number of destination addresses sent by the sender exceeds the maximum limit per day and is temporarily blacklisted. Please reduce the sending frequency or try again the next day. 3. The sender’s IP does not pass the SPF permission test of the sending domain. Emails sent in MTA mode may return this error code even if they are sent.
552	The sent email is too large or the email attachment type is prohibited
553	The sender and the email account are inconsistent, please configure the sender as your email account correctly.
554	The email was identified as spam. Please reduce the sending frequency or try again the next day
none	This indicates that there is no return code. If the sending result is “deferred”, the general reason is that the mail service area is configured incorrectly. Please check whether the server configuration is correct. If the sending result is “bounced”, the general reason is that the receiving email address domain name is wrong, please check whether the email recipient is the correct email address. If it is in MTA mode, please check whether the “domain” is configured to be in the same domain name as the “recipient”.

SMS Settings

SMS Configuration

Configuring the SMS feature on the UCM6300 series allows the administrators to enable two-factor authentication, to send alerts, and meeting notices.

SMS Template

The template of the SMS can be modified in “SMS Template” tab. Please note that carriers may require to pre-register the templates for SMS that the UCM will send. Refer to the Amazon and Twilio documentation for more information.

SMS Delivery Log

All the SMS messages sent will be logged in the following tab.

HA

Dual-system hot standby provides a highly reliable and fault-tolerant solution for enterprises using the UCM6300 series/UCM6300A series. Based on two UCM devices of the same product model and software version, one of them is in the “Active” working state in real-time, and the other is in the “Standby” working state. The daily data on the host server will be synchronized to the standby machine in real-time, and the standby machine always monitors the running status of the host. When the host fails, including hardware failures and severe software failures, the standby machine will immediately take over the business and enter the “Active” working state, and Upgrade to a host to ensure that the business is not interrupted, and the call will automatically resume.

The HA function provides two modes of operating. The first mode of function is Local Hot Standby, which offers a deployment that switches dynamically when the primary UCM encounters an issue. The second mode is Remote Disaster Recover, it offers deploying a back up UCM remotely, this offers an architecture that would not be affected by any disaster that might occur on the geolocation of the primary UCM.

HA Settings

The users can configure the HA under System Settings 🡪 HA settings page.

Local Hot Standby

Remote Disaster Recovery

HA Status

Once the HA is configured, the user can view its status under System Settings 🡪 HA 🡪 HA Status as shown below

HA Log

The user can view the HA log through the system settings 🡪 HA 🡪 HA log page. The HA log effectively records the execution results of past full backup actions, as well as the historical records that triggered the active/standby switchover.

Cluster

Clustering allows the user to expand the capabilities of the UCM6304 and UCM6308 by integrating maximum of 5 units. This provides resources to handle more meeting participants, which will allow to host larger meetings.

To configure the cluster, we will need two types of servers; a Business server, which is a one and only server that will be used for the administration of the operations. And a media server, which can either be one singular server, or for deployments that require more resource, the user can deploy up to 5 UCM units as media server. Media server will handle media related functions.

Business Server

To configure Business server, please access the UCM web UI then navigate to System Settings > Cluster, then tick the option “Enable Media Cluster”, and choose “Business Server” as the Device Role.

Media Server

To configure Media server, please access the web UI then navigate to System Settings > Cluster, then tick “Enable Media Cluster”.

For step-by-step configuration of the 1+N clustering feature, please refer to the following guide: https://documentation.grandstream.com/knowledge-base/ucm630x-1n-media-cluster-guide/

SNMP

SNMP integration in the UCM allows the administrator to monitor the components of the UCM remotely. SNMP is a useful integration to have a centralized monitoring dashboard that shows all the devices on your network, with that status of internal component. To configure the SNMP integration, please navigate to the web GUI of the UCM, then go to System Settings → SNMP → SNMP Settings

SNMP Settings

SNMP Community

You can also create SNMP communities and affect a certain level of access. An SNMP community is a group created to aggregate many management stations. The community name is used to authenticate and identify these machines in the NMS (Network Management System).

SNMP Traps Destination

SNMP Traps is a very useful feature when there are many network components to manage. Instead of sending requests to all the machines in the network in order to view their SNMP logs risking slowing down or bringing the network to a complete halt, SNMP Traps can be configured so these machines can send unrequested messages to the manager to notify it about critical events and general failures.

SNMP Version 3

UCM 63xx also supports SNMP v3 in case the system administrator decides to add more security to the monitoring process. SNMP v3 is a very good solution to monitor devices that interface directly with Internet. SNMP v3 offers more security than its predecessors by hashing the authentication information, encrypting the SNMP messages exchanged between the managed devices and the network management system which prevent eavesdropping. Also, it prevents any data tampering which protects the integrity of the data exchanged.

SNMP Trap Proxy

RADIUS

The UCM6300 offers Radius-based authentication for the super administrator and other administrators. This requires configuring a Radius server then enabling Radius client on the UCM6300 which can be found under System Settings → RADIUS

TR-069

To configure TR-069 on Grandstream devices, set the following parameters:

Parameter	Description
Enable TR-069	Toggle it on to enable TR-069. It is enabled by default
ACS URL	URL for TR-069 Auto Configuration Servers (ACS), e.g., http://myacs.grandstream.com
TR-069 Username	ACS username for TR-069 must be the same as in the ACS configuration.
TR-069 Password	ACS password for TR-069 must be the same as in the ACS configuration.
Periodic Inform Enable	Enables periodic inform. If set to Yes, the device will send inform packets to the ACS.
Periodic Inform Interval	A periodic time when UCM630X will send inform packets to TR-069 ACS server. This option is specified in seconds.
ACS Connection Request Username	The username for the ACS to connect to UCM.
ACS Connection Request Password	The password for the ACS to connect to UCM.
Connection Request Port	Port for incoming connection requests. The default value is 7547.
CPE Cert File	The Cert file for UCM to connect to the ACS via SSL.
CPE Cert Key	The Cert key for UCM to connect to the ACS via SSL.

PROVISIONING

Overview

Grandstream SIP Devices can be configured via Web interface as well as via configuration file through TFTP/HTTP/HTTPS download. All Grandstream SIP devices support a proprietary binary format configuration file and XML format configuration file. The UCM630X provides a Plug and Play mechanism to auto-provision the Grandstream SIP devices in a zero-configuration manner by generating an XML config file and having the phone download it within the LAN area. This allows users to finish the installation with ease and start using the SIP devices in a managed way.

To provision a phone, three steps are involved, i.e., discovery, configuration, and provisioning. This section explains how Zero Config works on the UCM630X. The settings for this feature can be accessed via Web GUI🡪Device Management🡪Zero Config.

Configuration Architecture for End Point Device

Starting from firmware version 1.0.7.10, the end point device configuration in ZeroConfig is divided into the following three layers with priority from the lowest to the highest:

• Global

This is the lowest layer. Users can configure the most basic options that could apply to all Grandstream SIP devices during provisioning via Zero config.

• Model

In this layer, users can define model-specific options for the configuration template.

• Device

This is the highest layer. Users can configure device-specific options for the configuration for the individual device here.

Each layer also has its own structure at different levels. Please see the figure below. The details for each layer are explained in sections [Global Configuration], [Model configuration] and [Device Configuration].

The configuration options in the model layer and device layer have all the option in global layers already, i.e., the options in the global layer is a subset of the options in the model layer and the device layer. If an option is set in all three layers with different values, the highest layer value will override the value in the lower layer. For example, if the user selects English for Language setting in Global Policy and Spanish for Language setting in Default Model Template, the language setting on the device to be provisioned will use Spanish as the model layer has higher priority than the global layer. To sum up, configurations in the higher layer will always override the configurations for the same options/fields in the lower layer when presented at the same time.

After understanding the zero-config configuration architecture, users could configure the available options for end point devices to be provisioned by the UCM630X by going through the three layers. This configuration architecture allows users to set up and manage the Grandstream end point devices in the same LAN area in a centralized way.

Auto-Provisioning Settings

By default, the Zero Config feature is enabled on the UCM630X for auto-provisioning. Three methods of auto-provisioning are used.

• SIP SUBSCRIBE

When the phone boots up, it sends out SUBSCRIBE to a multicast IP address in the LAN. The UCM630X discovers it and then sends a NOTIFY with the XML config file URL in the message body. The phone will then use the path to download the config file generated in the UCM630X and take the new configuration.

• DHCP OPTION 66

Route mode needs to be set to use this feature. When the phone restarts (by default DHCP Option 66 is turned on), it will send out a DHCP DISCOVER request. The UCM630X receives it and returns DHCP OFFER with the config server path URL in Option 66, for example, https://192.168.2.1:8089/zccgi/. The phone will then use the path to download the config file generated in the UCM630X.

• mDNS

When the phone boots up, it sends out an mDNS query to get the TFTP server address. The UCM630X will respond with its address. The phone will then send a TFTP request to download the XML config file from the UCM630X.

To start the auto-provisioning process, under Web GUI🡪Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Zero Config Settings, fill in the auto provision information.

Enable Zero Config	Enable or disable the zero-config feature on the PBX. The default setting is enabled.
Enable Automatic Configuration Assignment	By default, this is disabled. If disabled, when the SIP device boots up, the UCM630X will not send the SIP device the URL to download the config file, and therefore the SIP device will not be automatically provisioned by the UCM630X. Note: When disabled, SIP devices can still be provisioned by manually sending NOTIFY from the UCM630X which will include the XML config file URL for the SIP device to download.
Auto Assign Extension	If enabled, when the device is discovered, the PBX will automatically assign an extension within the range defined in “Zero Config Extension Segment” to the device. The default setting is disabled.
Zero Config Extension Segment	Click on the link “Zero Config Extension Segment” to specify the extension range to be assigned if “Automatically Assign Extension” is enabled. The default range is 5000-6299. Zero Config Extension Segment range can be defined in Web GUI🡪PBX Settings🡪General Settings🡪General page🡪Extension Preference section: “Auto Provision Extensions”.
Enable Pick Extension	If enabled, the extension list will be sent out to the device after receiving the device’s request. This feature is for the GXP series phones that support selecting extensions to be provisioned via the phone’s LCD. The default setting is disabled.
Pick Extension Segment	Click on the link “Pick Extension Segment” to specify the extension list to be sent to the device. The default range is 4000 to 4999. Pick Extension Segment range can be defined in Web GUI 🡪 PBX Settings 🡪 General Settings 🡪 General page 🡪 Extension Preference section: “Pick Extensions”.
Pick Extension Period (hour)	Specify the number of minutes to allow the phones being provisioned to pick extensions.
Subnet Whitelist	This feature allows the UCM to provision devices in different subnets other than the UCM network. Enter subnets IP addresses to allow devices within these subnets to be provisioned. The syntax is <IP>/<CIDR>. Examples: 10.0.0.1/8 192.168.6.0/24 Note: Only private IP ranges (10.0.0.0 | 172.16.0.0 | 192.168.0.0) are supported.

Please make sure an extension is manually assigned to the phone or “Automatically Assign Extension” is enabled during provisioning. After the configuration on the UCM630X Web GUI, click on “Save” and “Apply Changes”. Once the phone boots up and picks up the config file from the UCM630X, it will take the configuration right away.

Discovery

Grandstream endpoints are automatically discovered after bootup. Users could also manually discover devices by specifying the IP address or scanning the entire LAN network. Three methods are supported to scan the devices.

• PING
• ARP
• SIP Message (NOTIFY)

Click on “Auto Discover” under Web GUI🡪Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Zero Config, fill in the “Scan Method” and “Scan IP”. The IP address segment will be automatically filled in based on the network mask detected on the UCM630X. If users need to scan the entire network segment, enter 255 (for example, 192.168.40.255) instead of a specific IP address. Then click on “Save” to start discovering the devices within the same network. To successfully discover the devices, “Zero Config” needs to be enabled on the UCM630X Web GUI🡪Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Auto Provisioning Settings.

The following figure shows a list of discovered phones. The MAC address, IP Address, Extension (if assigned), Version, Vendor, Model, Connection Status, Create Config, Options (Edit /Delete /Update /Reboot /Access Device Web GUI) are displayed in the list.

When the UCM is set to “Dual” network method, the user will be able to choose which LAN interface to use for Auto-Discovery.

Firmware

In Firmware tab, users can upload to and manage firmware for endpoints. Additionally, firmware upload size limit has been increased from 300MB to 1GB.

• Enable: toggles whether the UCM will provision this firmware to endpoints if they are using the UCM as the firmware server. If not enabled, the UCM will reject requests from endpoints for this firmware.
• Model: The device model for which this firmware is intended for. Only for self-reference and has no effect on provisioning.
• Firmware: The firmware version of the file being uploaded. Only for self-reference and has no effect on provisioning.
• Remark: Add a comment about the uploaded firmware. Only for self-reference and has no effect on provisioning.
• Choose File to Upload: Select the firmware file to upload from the user’s PC. The file name must match the firmware file name requested by the endpoint.

Uploading Devices List

Besides the built-in discovery method on the UCM, users could prepare a list of devices on a .CSV file and upload it by clicking on the button ”Import”, after which a success message prompt should be displayed.

Users need to make sure that the CSV file respects the format as shown on the following figure and that the entered information is correct (valid IP address, valid MAC address, device model, and an existing account), otherwise the UCM will reject the file and the operation will fail:

Managing Discovered Devices

• Sorting: Press or to sort per MAC Address, IP Address, Version, Vendor, Model or Create Config columns from lower to higher or higher to lower, respectively.
• Filter: Select a filter to display corresponding results.
• All: Display all discovered devices.
• Scan Results: Display only manually discovered devices. [Discovery]
• IP Address: Enter device IP and press the Search button.
• MAC Address: Enter device MAC and press the Search button.
• Model: Enter a model name and press the Search button. Example: GXP2130.
• Extension: Enter the extension number and press the Search button.

From the main menu of ZeroConfig, users can perform the following operations:

• Click to access the discovery menu as shown on the [Discovery] section.
• Click to add a new device to the ZeroConfig database using its MAC address.
• Click to delete selected devices from the zero-config database.
• Click to modify selected devices.
• Click to batch update a list of devices, the UCM on this case will send SIP NOTIFY message to all selected devices to update them at once.
• Click to reboot selected devices (the selected devices, should have been provisioned with extensions since the phone will authenticate the server which is trying to send it reboot command).
• Click to clear all devices configurations.
• Click to upload CSV file containing a list of devices.
• Click to export CSV file containing a list of devices. This file can be imported to another UCM to quickly set it up with the original UCM’s devices.
• Click to copy configuration from one device to another. This can be useful for easily replacing devices and note that this feature works only between devices of the same model.

All these operations will be detailed in the next sections.

When a new firmware is detected for the discovered devices, an upgrade icon will appear next to the firmware version installed on the device.

Global Configuration

The global configuration will apply to all the connected Grandstream SIP end point devices in the same LAN with the UCM630X no matter what the Grandstream device model it is. It is divided into two levels:

• Global Policy
• Global Templates

Global Policy

Global Policy can be accessed in Web GUI🡪Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Global Policy page. On the top of the configuration table, users can select a category in the “Options” dropdown list to quickly navigate to the category or they can also complete the configuration by importing/exporting. The categories are:

• Localization: configure display language, data, and time.
• Phone Settings: configure the dial plan, call features, NAT, call progress tones, etc.
• Contact List: configure LDAP and XML phonebook download.
• Maintenance: configure upgrading, web access, Telnet/SSH access, and Syslog.
• Network Settings: configure the IP address, QoS, and STUN settings.
• Customization: customize LCD screen wallpaper for the supported models.
• Communication Settings: configure Email and FTP settings

Select the checkbox on the left of the parameter you would like to configure to activate the dropdown list for this parameter.

The following tables list the Global Policy configuration parameters for the SIP end device.

Language settings
Language	Select the LCD display language on the SIP end device.
Date and Time
Date Format	Configure the date display format on the SIP end device’s LCD.
Time Format	Configure the time display in 12-hour or 24-hour format on the SIP end device’s LCD.
Enable NTP	To enable the NTP service.
NTP Server	Configure the URL or IP address of the NTP server. The SIP end device may obtain the date and time from the server.
NTP Update Interval	Configure the NTP update interval.
Time Zone	Configure the time zone used on the SIP end device.
Enable Daylight Saving Time	Select either to enable or disable the DST.

Default Call Settings
Dial Plan	Configure the default dial plan rule. For syntax and examples, please refer to the user manual of the SIP devices to be provisioned for more details.
Enable Call Features	When enabled, “Do Not Disturb”, “Call Forward” and other call features can be used via the local feature code on the phone. Otherwise, the ITSP feature code will be used.
Use # as Dial Key	If set to “Yes”, pressing the number key “#” will immediately dial out the input digits.
Auto Answer by Call-info	If set to “Yes”, the phone will automatically turn on the speaker phone to answer incoming calls after a short reminding beep, based on the SIP Call-Info header sent from the server/proxy. The default setting is enabled.
NAT Traversal	Configure if NAT traversal mechanism is activated.
User Random Port	If set to “Yes”, this parameter will force random generation of both the local SIP and RTP ports.
General Settings
Call Progress Tones	Configure call progress tones including ring tone, dial tone, second dial tone, message waiting tone, ring back tone, call waiting tone, busy tone, and reorder tone using the following syntax: f1=val, f2=val[, c=on1/ off1[- on2/ off2[- on3/ off3]]]; Frequencies are in Hz and cadence on and off are in 10ms). “on” is the period (in ms) of ringing while “off” is the period of silence. Up to three cadences are supported. Please refer to the user manual of the SIP devices to be provisioned for more details
HEADSET Key Mode	Select “Default Mode” or “Toggle Headset/Speaker” for the Headset key. Please refer to the user manual of the SIP devices to be provisioned for more details.

LDAP Phonebook
Source	Select “Manual” or “PBX” as the LDAP configuration source. If “Manual” is selected, the LDAP configuration below will be applied to the SIP end device. If “PBX” is selected, the LDAP configuration built-in from UCM630X Web GUI🡪System Settings🡪LDAP Server will be applied.
Address	Configure the IP address or DNS name of the LDAP server.
Port	Configure the LDAP server port. The default value is 389.
Base DN	This is the location in the directory where the search is requested to begin. Example: dc=grandstream, dc=com ou=Boston, dc=grandstream, dc=com
Username	Configure the bind “Username” for querying LDAP servers. The field can be left blank if the LDAP server allows anonymous binds.
Password	Configure the bind “Password” for querying LDAP servers. The field can be left blank if the LDAP server allows anonymous binds.
Number Filter	Configure the filter used for number lookups. Please refer to the user manual for more details.
Name Filter	Configure the filter used for name lookups. Please refer to the user manual for more details.
Version	Select the protocol version for the phone to send the bind requests. The default value is 3.
Name Attribute	Specify the “name” attributes of each record that are returned in the LDAP search result. Example: gn cn sn description
Number Attribute	Specify the “number” attributes of each record that are returned in the LDAP search result. Example: telephoneNumber telephoneNumber Mobile
Display Name	Configure the entry information to be shown on the phone’s LCD. Up to 3 fields can be displayed.  Example: %cn %sn %telephoneNumber
Max Hits	Specify the maximum number of results to be returned by the LDAP server. The valid range is 1 to 3000. The default value is 50.
Search Timeout	Specify the interval (in seconds) for the server to process the request and the client waits for the server to return. The valid range is 0 to 180. The default value is 30.
Sort Results	Specify whether the searching result is sorted or not. The default setting is No.
Incoming Calls	Configure to enable LDAP number searching when receiving calls. The default setting is No.
Outgoing Calls	Configure to enable LDAP number searching when making calls. The default setting is No.
Lookup Display Name	Configures the display name when LDAP looks up the name for an incoming call or outgoing call. It must be a subset of the LDAP Name Attributes.
XML Phonebook
Phonebook XML Server	Select the source of the phonebook XML server. Disable Disable phonebook XML downloading. Manual Once selected, users need to specify downloading protocol HTTP, HTTPS, or TFTP and the server path to download the phonebook XML file. The server path could be an IP address or URL, with up to 256 characters. Local UCM Server Once selected, click on the Server Path field to upload the phonebook XML file. Please note after uploading the phonebook XML file to the server, the original file name will be used as the directory name and the file will be renamed as phonebook.xml under that directory.
Phonebook Download Interval	Configure the phonebook download interval (in minutes). If set to 0, the automatic download will be disabled. The valid range is 5 to 720.
Remove manually edited entries on download	If set to “Yes”, when XML phonebook is downloaded, the entries added manually will be automatically removed.

Upgrade and Provision
Firmware Source	Firmware source via ZeroConfig provisioning could be a URL for external server address, local UCM directory, or USB media if plugged into the UCM630X. Select a source to get the firmware file: URL If selected to use URL to upgrade, complete the configuration for the following four parameters: “Upgrade Via”, “Server Path”, “File Prefix” and “File Postfix”. Local UCM Server Firmware can be uploaded to the UCM630X internal storage for firmware upgrade. If selected, click on the “Manage Storage” icon next to the “Directory” option, upload the firmware file, and select a directory for the end device to retrieve the firmware file. Local USB Media If selected, the USB storage device needs to be plugged into the UCM630X and the firmware file must be put under a folder named “ZC_firmware” in the USB storage root directory. Local SD Card Media If selected, an SD card needs to be plugged into the UCM630X and the firmware file must be put under a folder named “ZC_firmware” in the USB storage root directory.
Upgrade via	When URL is selected as firmware source, configure upgrade via TFTP, HTTP, or HTTPS.
Server Path	When URL is selected as firmware source, configure the firmware upgrading server path.
File Prefix	Configure the Config Server Path.
Config Server Path	When URL is selected as firmware source, configure the firmware file postfix. If configured, only the configuration file with the matching encrypted postfix will be downloaded and flashed into the phone.
Allow DHCP Option 43/66	If DHCP option 43 or 66 is enabled on the LAN side, the TFTP server can be redirected.
Automatic Upgrade	If enabled, the end point device will automatically upgrade if a new firmware is detected. Users can select automatic upgrading by day, by week, or by minute. By week Once selected, specify the day of the week to check the HTTP/TFTP server for firmware upgrades or configuration files changes. By day Once selected, specify the hour of the day to check the HTTP/TFTP server for firmware upgrades or configuration files changes. By minute Once selected, specify the interval X that the SIP end device will request for new firmware every X minutes.
Firmware Upgrade Rule	Specify how firmware upgrading and provisioning requests are to be sent.
Zero Config	Select either to enable or disable Zero Config.
Web Access
Admin Password	Configure the administrator password for admin-level login.
End-User Password	Configure the end-user password for the end-user level login.
Web Access Mode	Select HTTP or HTTPS as the web access protocol.
Web Server Port	Configure the port for web access. The valid range is 1 to 65535.
RTSP Port	Configure the RTSP Port.
Enable UPnP Discovery	Select either to enable or disable Enable UPnP Discovery
Login Settings	Configure the login settings.
User Login Timeout	Configure User Login Timeout.
Maximum Consecutive Failed Login Attempts	Configure Maximum Consecutive Failed Login Attempts.
Login Error Lock Time	Configure Login Error Lock Time.
Security
Disable Telnet/SSH	Enable Telnet/SSH access for the SIP end device. If the SIP end device supports Telnet access, this option controls the Telnet access of the device; if the SIP end device supports SSH access, this option controls the SSH access of the device.
Syslog
Syslog Server	Configure the URL/IP address for the Syslog server.
Syslog Level	Select the level of logging for Syslog.
Send SIP Log	Configure whether the SIP log will be included in the Syslog message.

Basic Settings
IP Address	Configure how the SIP end device shall obtain the IP address. DHCP or PPPoE can be selected. DHCP Once selected, users can specify the Host Name (option 12) of the SIP end device as DHCP client, and Vendor Class ID (option 60) used by the client and server to exchange vendor class ID information. PPPoE Once selected, users need to specify the Account ID, Password, and Service Name for PPPoE.
Host Name	Specify the name of the client. This field is optional but may be required by Internet Service Providers.
Vendor Class ID	Used by clients and servers to exchange vendor class ID.
Account ID	Enter the PPPoE account ID.
Password	Enter the PPPoE Password.
Service Name	Enter the PPPoE Service Name.
Advanced Setting
Layer 3 QoS	Define the Layer 3 QoS parameter. This value is used for IP Precedence, Diff-Serv, or MPLS. The valid range is 0-63.
Layer 3 QoS For RTP	Assign the priority value of the Layer 3 QoS for RTP packets. The valid range is 0 -63.
Layer 3 QoS For SIP	Assign the priority value of the Layer 3 QoS for SIP packets. The valid range is 0 -63.
Layer 2 QoS Tag	Assign the VLAN Tag of the Layer 2 QoS packets. The valid range is 0 -4095.
Layer 2 QoS Priority Value	Assign the priority value of the Layer 2 QoS packets. The valid range is 0-7.
STUN Server	Configure the IP address or Domain name of the STUN server. Only non-symmetric NAT routers work with STUN.
Keep-Alive	Select either to enable or disable Keep Alive.
Keep Alive Interval	Specify how often the phone will send a blank UDP packet to the SIP server to keep the “ping hole” on the NAT router open. The valid range is 10-160.
Register Expiration	Specify the Register Expiration.
Local SIP Port	Configure Local SIP Port.
Local RTP Port	Configure Local RTP Port.
Auto On-Hook Timer(s)	Configure Auto On-Hook Timer(s).
Ring Timeout	Configure Ring Timeout.
SIP Transport	Select either UDP, TCP, or TLS/TCP as SIP transport protocol.
Direct IP Call	Select either to disable or enable Direct IP Call support.
SIP Proxy Compatibility Mode	Select either to disable or enable SIP Proxy Compatibility Mode.
Unregister On Reboot	Select either to disable or enable Unregister On Reboot.
Whitelist
Whitelist	Select either to enable or disable Whitelist
SIP Phone Number Whitelist	Configure the SIP Phone Number Whitelist.

Wallpaper
Screen Resolution 1024 x 600	Check this option if the SIP end device shall use 1024 x 600 resolution for the LCD screen wallpaper. Source Configure the location where wallpapers are stored. File If “URL” is selected as the source, specify the URL of the wallpaper file. If “Local UCM Server” is selected as the source, click to upload wallpaper file to the UCM630X.
Screen Resolution 800 x 400	Check this option if the SIP end device shall use 800 x 400 resolution for the LCD screen wallpaper. Source Configure the location where wallpapers are stored. File If “URL” is selected as the source, specify the URL of the wallpaper file. If “Local UCM Server” is selected as the source, click to upload wallpaper file to the UCM630X.
Screen Resolution 480 x 272	Check this option if the SIP end device shall use 480 x 272 resolution for the LCD screen wallpaper. Source Configure the location where wallpapers are stored. File If “URL” is selected as the source, specify the URL of the wallpaper file. If “Local UCM Server” is selected as the source, click to upload wallpaper file to the UCM630X.
Screen Resolution 320 x 240	Check this option if the SIP end device supports 320 x 240 resolution for the LCD screen wallpaper. Source Configure the location where wallpapers are stored. File If “URL” is selected as the source, specify the URL of the wallpaper file. If “Local UCM Server” is selected as the source, click to upload wallpaper file to the UCM630X.

Global Policy Parameters – Communication Settings

Email Settings
SMTP Settings	Check this option to configure the email settings that will be sent to the provisioned phones: Server The IP address of the SMTP server Port SMTP server port From E-Mail address Email address Sender Username Username of the sender Password Recovery Email Email where the recovered password will be sent Alarm receive Email 1 Email address where alarms notifications will be sent Alarm receive Email 1 Email address where alarms notifications will be sent Enable SSL Enable SSL protocol for SMTP
FTP
FTP	Check this option to configure the FTP settings that will be sent to the provisioned phones: Storage Server Type Either FTP or Central Storage Server FTP server address Port FTP port to be used Username FTP username Path FTP Directory path

Global Templates

Global Templates can be accessed in Web GUI🡪Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Global Templates. Users can create multiple global templates with different sets of configurations and save the templates, or click on the “Import/Export” button to add multiple global templates. Later on, when the user configures the device in the Edit Device dialog🡪Advanced Settings, the user can select to use one of the global templates for the device. Please refer to section [Manage Devices] for more details on using the global templates.

When creating a global template, users can select the categories and the parameters under each category to be used in the template. The global policy and the selected global template will both take effect when generating the config file. However, the selected global template has higher priority to the global policy when it comes to the same setting option/field. If the same option/field has a different value configured in the global policy and the selected global template, the value for this option/field in the selected global template will override the value in global policy.

Click on “Add” to add a global template. Users will see the following configurations.

Template Name	Create a name to identify this global template.
Description	Describe the global template. This is optional.
Active	Check this option to enable the global template.

• Click on to edit the global template.

The window for editing the global template is shown in the following figure. In the “Options” field, after entering the option name keyword, the options containing the keyword will be listed. Users could then select the options to be modified under the global template.

The added options will show in the list. Users can then enter or select the value for each option to be used in the global template. On the left side of each added option, users can click to delete this option from the template. On the right side of each option, users can click on to reset the option value to the default value.

Click on “Save” to save this global template.

• The created global templates will show in the Web GUI🡪Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Global Templates page. Users can click on to delete the global template or delete multiple selected templates at once.
• Click on “Toggle Selected Template(s)” to toggle the status between enabled/disabled for the selected templates.

Model Configuration

Model templates

Model layer configuration allows users to apply model-specific configurations to different devices. Users could create/edit/delete a model template by accessing Web GUI, page Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Model Templates. If multiple model templates are created and enabled, when the user configures the device in the Edit Device dialog🡪Advanced Settings, the user can select to use one of the model templates for the device. Please refer to section [Manage Devices] for more details on using the model template.

For each created model template, users can assign it as the default model template. If assigned as the default model template, the values in this model template will be applied to all the devices of this model. There is always only one default model template that can be assigned at one time on the UCM630X.

The selected model template and the default model template will both take effect when generating the config file for the device. However, the model template has a higher priority than the default model template when it comes to the same setting option/field. If the same option/field has different value configured in the default model template and the selected model template, the value for this option/field in the selected model template will override the value in default model template.

• Click on “Add” to add a model template.

Model	Select a model to apply this template. The supported Grandstream models are listed in the dropdown list for selection.
Template Name	Create a name for the model template.
Description	Enter a description for the model template. This is optional.
Default Model Template	Select to assign this model template as the default model template. The value of the option in the default model template will be overridden if another selected model template has a different value for the same option.
Active	Check this option to enable the model template.

• Click on to edit the model template.

The editing window for a model template is shown in the following figure. In the “Options” field, enter the option name key word, the option that contains the keyword will be listed. The user could then select the option to be modified under the model template.

Once added, the option will be shown in the list below. On the left side of each option, users can click on to remove this option from the model template. On the right side of each option, users can click on to reset the option to the default value.

The user could also click on “Add New Field” to add a P-value number and the value to the configuration. The following figure shows setting P-value “P1362” to “en”, which means the display language on the LCD is set to English. For P-value information of different models, please refer to the configuration template here http://www.grandstream.com/support/tools

• Click on Save when done. The model template will be displayed on Web GUI🡪Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Model Templates page.
• Click on to delete the model template or click on “Delete Selected Templates” to delete multiple selected templates at once.
• Click on “Toggle Selected Template(s)” to toggle the status between enabled/disabled for the selected model templates.
• Click on the “Import/Export” button to upload/export the model template list in .CSV format.

To make it easier for the administrator to search through the templates, a filter button has been added the user interface. Please see the screenshot below:

Model Update

UCM630X Zero Config feature supports provisioning all models of Grandstream SIP end devices including OEM device models.

OEM Models

Users can associate OEM device models with their original Grandstream-branded models, allowing these OEM devices to be provisioned appropriately.

• Click on button.
• In the Source Model field, select the Grandstream device that the OEM model is based on from the dropdown list.
• For the Destination Model and Destination Vendor field, enter the custom OEM model name and vendor name.
• The newly added OEM model should now be selectable as an option in Model fields.

To make it easier for the users to search for the model templates to download or update, a filter button has been added to the user interface.

Model Template Package List

Templates for most of the Grandstream models are built-in with the UCM630X already. Templates for Wave and Grandstream surveillance products require users to download and install under Web GUI🡪Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Model Update first before they are available in the UCM630X for selection. After downloading and installing the model template to the UCM630X, it will show in the dropdown list for “Model” selection when editing the model template.

• Click on to download the template.
• Click on to upgrade the model template. Users will see this icon available if the device model has a template updated in the UCM630X.

Upload Model Template Package

In case the UCM630X is placed in the private network and Internet access is restricted, users will not be able to get packages by downloading and installing from the remote server. Model template packages can be manually uploaded from a local device through Web GUI. Please contact Grandstream customer support if the model package is needed for manual uploading.

Device Configuration

On Web GUI, page Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Zero Config, users could create a new device, delete existing device(s), make special configuration for a single device, or send NOTIFY to an existing device(s).

Create New Device

Besides configuring the device after the device is discovered, users could also directly create a new device and configure basic settings before the device is discovered by the UCM630X. Once the device is plugged in, it can then be discovered and provisioned. This gives the system administrator adequate time to set up each device beforehand.

Click on “Add” and the following dialog will show. Follow the steps below to create the configurations for the new device.

1. Firstly, select a model for the device to be created and enter its MAC address, IP address, and firmware version (optional) in the corresponding field.
2. Basic settings will show a list of settings based on the model selected in step 1. Users could assign extensions to accounts, assign functions to Line Keys and Multiple-Purposed Keys if supported on the selected model.
3. Click on “save” to save the configuration for this device.

Manage Devices

The device manually created or discovered from Auto Discover will be listed in the Web GUI🡪Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Zero Config page. Users can see the devices with their MAC address, IP address, vendor, model, etc.

• Click on to access the Web GUI of the phone.
• Click on to edit the device configuration.

A new dialog will be displayed for the users to configure “Basic” settings and “Advanced” settings. “Basic” settings have the same configurations as displayed when manually creating a new device, i.e., account, line key, and MPK settings; “Advanced” settings allow users to configure more details in a five-level structure.

A preview of the “Advanced” settings is shown in the above figure. There are five levels configurations as described in (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) below, with priority from the lowest to the highest. The configurations in all levels will take effect for the device. If the same options are existing in different level configurations with different values configured, the higher-level configuration will override the lower-level configuration.

1. Global Policy

This is the lowest level configuration. The global policy configured in Web GUI🡪Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Global Policy will be applied here. Clicking on “Modify Global Policy” to redirect to page Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Global Policy.

2. Global Templates

Select a global template to be used for the device and click on to add. Multiple global templates can be selected, and users can arrange the priority by adjusting orders via and . All the selected global templates will take effect. If the same option exists on multiple selected global templates, the value in the template with higher priority will override the one in the template with lower priority. Click on to remove the global template from the selected list.

3. Default Model Template

Default Model Template will be applied to the devices of this model. Default model template can be configured in the model template under Web GUI🡪Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Model Templates page. Please see the default model template option in [Create New Model Template].

4. Model Templates

Select a model template to be used for the device and click on to add. Multiple model templates can be selected, and users can arrange the priority by adjusting orders via and . All the selected model templates will take effect. If the same option exists on multiple selected model templates, the value in the template with higher priority will override the one in the template with lower priority. Click on to remove the model template from the selected list.

5. Customize Device Settings

This is the highest-level configuration for the device. Click on “Modify Customize Device Settings” and the following dialog will show.

Scroll down in the dialog to view and edit the device-specific options. If the users would like to add more options that are not in the pre-defined list, click on “Add New Field” to add a P-value number and the value to the configuration. The above figure shows setting P-value “P1362” to “en”, which means the display language on the LCD is set to English. The warning information on the right tells that the option matching the P-value number exists and clicking on it will lead to the matching option. For P-value information of different models, please refer to the configuration template here http://www.grandstream.com/sites/default/files/Resources/config-template.zip.

• Select multiple devices that need to be modified and then click on ”Update Config” to batch modify devices.

If selected devices are of the same model, the configuration dialog is like the following figure. Configurations in five levels are all available for users to modify.

If selected devices are of different models, the configuration dialog is like the following figure. Click on to view more devices of other models. Users are only allowed to make modifications to the Global Templates and Global Policy level.

After the above configurations, save the changes and go back to Web GUI🡪Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Zero Config page. Users could then click on to send NOTIFY to the SIP end point device and trigger the provisioning process. The device will start downloading the generated configuration file from the URL contained in the NOTIFY message.

On this web page, users can also click on “Reset All Extensions” to reset the extensions of all the devices.

Sample Application

Assuming in a small business office where there are 8 GXP2140 phones used by customer support and 1 GXV3275 phone used by customer support supervisor. 3 of the 8 customer support members speak Spanish and the rest speak English. We could deploy the following configurations to provision the office phones for the customer support team.

1. Go to Web GUI🡪Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Zero Config Settings, select “Enable Zero Config”.
2. Go to Web GUI🡪Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Global Policy, configure Date Format, Time Format, and Firmware Source as follows.

3. Go to Web GUI🡪Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Model Templates, create a new model template “English Support Template” for GXP2170. Add option “Language” and set it to “English”. Then select the option “Default Model Template” to make it the default model template.
4. Go to Web GUI🡪Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Model Templates, create another model template “Spanish Support Template” for GXP2170. Add option “Language” and set it to “Español”.
5. After 9 devices are powered up and connected to the LAN network, use the “Auto Discover” function or “Create New Device” function to add the devices to the device list on Web GUI🡪Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Zero Config.
6. On Web GUI🡪Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Zero Config page, users could identify the devices by their MAC addresses or IP addresses displayed on the list. Click on to edit the device settings.
7. For each of the 5 phones used by English-speaking customer support, in “Basic settings” select an available extension for account 1 and click on “Save”. Then click on the “Advanced settings” tab to bring up the following dialog. Users will see the English support template is applied since this is the default model template. A preview of the device settings will be listed on the right side.

8. For the 3 phones used by Spanish support, in “Basic settings” select an available extension for account 1 and click on “Save”. Then click on the “Advanced settings” tab to bring up the following dialog.
   

Select “Spanish Support Template” in “Model Template”. The preview of the device settings is displayed on the right side and we can see the language is set to “Español” since Model Template has the higher priority for the option “Language”, which overrides the value configured in the default model template.

9. For the GXV3275 used by the customer support supervisor, select an available extension for account 1 on “Basic settings” and click on “Save”. Users can see the preview of the device configuration in “Advanced settings”. There is no model template configured for GXV3275.

10. Click on “Apply Changes” to apply saved changes.
11. On the Web GUI🡪Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Zero Config page, click on to send NOTIFY to trigger the device to download the config file from UCM630X.

Now all the 9 phones in the network will be provisioned with a unique extension registered on the UCM630X. 3 of the phones will be provisioned to display Spanish on LCD and the other 5 will be provisioned to display English on LCD. The GXV3275 used by the supervisor will be provisioned to use the default language on the LCD display since it is not specified in the global policy.

EXTENSIONS

Create New User

Create New SIP Extension

To manually create a new SIP user, go to Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Extensions. Click on “Add” and a new window will show for users to fill in the extension information.

Extension options are divided into five categories:

• Basic Settings
• Media
• Features
• Specific Time
• Wave
• Follow me

Select first which type of extension: SIP Extension, IAX Extension, or FXS Extension. The configuration parameters are as follows.

SIP Extension Configuration Parameters🡪Basic Settings

SIP Extension Configuration Parameters🡪Media

SIP Extension Configuration Parameters🡪Features

Specific Time
Time Condition	Click to add Time Condition to configure a specific time for this extension.

SIP Extension Configuration Parameters🡪Wave

Create New IAX Extension

The UCM630X supports Inter-Asterisk eXchange (IAX) protocol. IAX is used for transporting VoIP telephony sessions between servers and terminal devices. IAX is like SIP but also has its own characteristic. For more information, please refer to RFC 5465.

To manually create a new IAX user, go to Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Extensions. Click on “Add” and a new dialog window will show for users which need to make sure first to select the extension type to be IAX Extension before proceeding to fill in the extension information. The configuration parameters are as follows.

IAX Extension Configuration Parameters🡪Specific Time

Create New FXS Extension

The UCM630X supports Foreign eXchange Subscriber (FXS) interface. FXS is used when a user needs to connect analog phone lines or FAX machines to the UCM630X.

To manually create a new FXS user, go to Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Extensions. Click on “Add” and a new dialog window will show for users which need to make sure first to select the extension type to be FXS Extension before proceeding to fill in the extension information. The configuration parameters are as follows.

Batch Add Extensions

Batch Add SIP Extensions

To add multiple SIP extensions, BATCH add can be used to create standardized SIP extension accounts. However, a unique extension username cannot be set using BATCH add.

Under Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Extensions, click on “Add” and select extension type as a SIP extension, and “Select Add Method” as Batch.

General
Create Number	Specify the number of extensions to be added. The default setting is 5.
Extension Incrementation	Select how much to increment successive extensions. For example, if the value is 2, the extensions will be 1000,1002,1004, …… Note: Up to 3 characters.
Extension	Configure the starting extension number of the batch of extensions to be added.
Permission	Assign permission level to the user. The available permissions are “Internal”, “Local”, “National” and “International” from the lowest level to the highest level. The default setting is “Internal”. Note: Users need to have the same level as or higher level than an outbound rule’s privilege to make outbound calls from this rule.
Voicemail	Configure Voicemail. There are three valid options, and the default option is “Enable Local Voicemail”. Disable Voicemail: Disable Voicemail. Enable Local Voicemail: Enable voicemail for the user. Enable Remote Voicemail: Forward the notify message from the remote voicemail system for the user, and the local voicemail will be disabled. Note: Remote voicemail feature is used only for Infomatec (Brazil).
SIP/IAX Password	Configure the SIP/IAX password for the users. Three options are available to create a password for the batch of extensions. User Random Password. A random secure password will be automatically generated. It is recommended to use this password for security purposes. Use Extension as Password. Enter a password to be used on all the extensions in the batch.
Voicemail Password	Configure Voicemail password (digits only) for the users. User Random Password. A random password in digits will be automatically generated. It is recommended to use this password for security purposes. Use Extension as Password. Enter a password to be used on all the extensions in the batch.
Send Voicemail to Email	Send voicemail messages to the configured email address. If set to “Default”, the global setting will be used. Global settings can be found in Voicemail->Voicemail Email Settings.
Keep Voicemail after Emailing	Only applies if extension-level or global Send Voicemail to Email is enabled.
CallerID Number	Configure CallerID Number when adding Batch Extensions. Use Extension as Number Users can choose to use the extension number as CallerID Use as Number Users can choose to set a specific number instead of using the extension number.
Skip Voicemail Password Verification	When a user dials voicemail code, the password verification IVR is skipped. If enabled, this would allow one-button voicemail access. By default, this option is disabled.
Enable Keep-alive	If enabled, the PBX will regularly send SIP OPTIONS to check if the host device is online.
Keep-alive Frequency	Configure the keep-alive interval (in seconds) to check if the host is up.
Disable This Extension	Check this box to disable this extension.
Enable SCA	If enabled, (1) Call Forward, Call Waiting, and Do Not Disturb settings will not work, (2) Concurrent Registrations can be set only to 1, and (3) Private numbers can be added in Call Features🡪SCA page.
Emergency Calls CID	CallerID number that will be used when calling out and receiving direct callbacks.
Enable Wave	If enabled, the extension can be registered to and accessed via Wave. If disabled, Wave cannot be used, but regular registration and calling functionality will still work.
Sync Contact	If enabled, this extension number will be displayed in the Wave contact, otherwise, it will not be displayed, and it cannot be found in the chat, but the user can still dial this number.
Language	Select voice prompt language for this extension. If set to “Default”, the global setting for voice prompt language will be used.
Media
NAT	Use NAT when the PBX is on a public IP communicating with devices hidden behind NAT (e.g., broadband router). If there is a one-way audio issue, usually it is related to NAT configuration or the Firewall’s support of SIP and RTP ports. The default setting is enabled.
Enable Direct Media	By default, the PBX will route the media steams from SIP endpoints through itself. If enabled, the PBX will attempt to negotiate with the endpoints to route the media stream directly. It is not always possible for the PBX to negotiate endpoint-to-endpoint media routing. The default setting is “No”.
DTMF Mode	Select DTMF mode for the user to send DTMF. The default setting is “RFC4733”. If “Info” is selected, the SIP INFO message will be used. If “Inband” is selected, a-law or u-law are required. When “Auto” is selected, RFC4733 will be used if offered, otherwise “Inband” will be used.
Alert-info	When present in an INVITE request, the Alert-info header field specifies an alternative ring tone to the UAS.
SRTP	Enable/disable SRTP for RTP stream encryption.
Packet Loss Retransmission	Configure to enable Packet Loss Retransmission. NACK NACK+RTX(SSRC-GROUP) OFF
Video FEC	Check to enable Forward Error Correction (FEC) for Video.
FECC	Configure to enable FECC
Audio FEC	Check to enable Forward Error Correction (FEC) for Audio.
ACL Policy	Access Control List manages the IP addresses that can register to this extension. Allow All: Any IP address can register to this extension. Local Network: Only IP addresses in the configured network segments can register to this extension. Press “Add Local Network Address” to add more IP segments.
Jitter Buffer	Select the jitter buffer method. Disable: Jitter buffer will not be used. Fixed: Jitter buffer with a fixed size (equal to the value of “jitter buffer size”) Adaptive: Jitter buffer with an adaptive size (no more than the value of “max jitter buffer”). NetEQ: Dynamic jitter buffer via NetEQ.
Codec Preference	Configure the codecs to be used.
Call Transfer
Presence Status	Select which presence status to set for the extension and configure call forward conditions for each status. Six possible options are possible: “Available”, “Away”, “Chat”, “Custom”, “DND” and “Unavailable”. More details at [PRESENCE].
Call Forward Unconditional	Enable and configure the Call Forward Unconditional target number. Available options for target number are: “None”: Call forward deactivated. “Extension”: Select an extension from the dropdown list as CFU target. “Custom Number”: Enter a customer number as a target. For example: *97. “Voicemail”: Select an extension from the dropdown list. Incoming calls will be forwarded to the voicemail of the selected extension. “Ring Group”: Select a ring group from the dropdown list as CFU target. “Queues”: Select a queue from the dropdown list as CFU target. “Voicemail Group”: Select a voicemail group from the dropdown list as CFU target. The default setting is “None”.
CFU Time Condition	Select time condition for Call Forward Unconditional. CFU takes effect only during the selected time condition. The available time conditions are “Office Time”, “Out of Office Time”, “Holiday”, “Out of Holiday”, “Out of Office Time or Holiday”, and “Specific”. Note: “Specific” has higher priority to “Office Times” if there is a conflict in terms of time period. Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for a specific time. Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page System Settings🡪Time Settings🡪Office Time/Holiday page.
Call Forward No Answer	Configure the Call Forward No Answer target number. Available options for target number are: “None”: Call forward deactivated. “Extension”: Select an extension from the dropdown list as CFN target. “Custom Number”: Enter a customer number as a target. For example: *97. “Voicemail”: Select an extension from the dropdown list. Incoming calls will be forwarded to the voicemail of the selected extension. “Ring Group”: Select a ring group from the dropdown list as CFN target. “Queues”: Select a queue from the dropdown list as CFN target. “Voicemail Group”: Select a voicemail group from the dropdown list as CFN target. The default setting is “None”.
CFN Time Condition	Select time condition for Call Forward No Answer. The available time conditions are “Office Time”, “Out of Office Time”, “Holiday”, “Out of Holiday”, “Out of Office Time or Holiday”, and “Specific”. Notes: “Specific” has higher priority to “Office Times” if there is a conflict in terms of time period. Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for a specific time. Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page System Settings🡪Time Settings🡪Office Time/Holiday page.
Call Forward Busy	Configure the Call Forward Busy target number. Available options for target number are: “None”: Call forward deactivated. “Extension”: Select an extension from the dropdown list as CFB target. “Custom Number”: Enter a customer number as a target. For example: *97. “Voicemail”: Select an extension from the dropdown list. Incoming calls will be forwarded to the voicemail of the selected extension. “Ring Group”: Select a ring group from the dropdown list as CFB target. “Queues”: Select a queue from the dropdown list as CFB target. “Voicemail Group”: Select a voicemail group from the dropdown list as CFB target. The default setting is “None”.
CFB Time Condition	Select time condition for Call Forward Busy. The available time conditions are “Office Time”, “Out of Office Time”, “Holiday”, “Out of Holiday”, “Out of Office Time or Holiday”, and “Specific”. Notes: “Specific” has higher priority to “Office Times” if there is a conflict in terms of time period. Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for a specific time. Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page System Settings🡪Time Settings🡪Office Time/Holiday page.
Do Not Disturb	If Do Not Disturb is enabled, all incoming calls will be dropped. All call forward settings will be ignored.
DND Time Condition	Select time condition for Do Not Disturb. The available time conditions are “Office Time”, “Out of Office Time”, “Holiday”, “Out of Holiday”, “Out of Office Time or Holiday”, and “Specific”. Notes: “Specific” has higher priority to “Office Times” if there is a conflict in terms of time period. Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for a specific time. Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page System Settings🡪Time Settings🡪Office Time/Holiday page.
DND Whitelist	If DND is enabled, calls from the whitelisted numbers will not be rejected. Multiple numbers are supported and must be separated by new lines. Pattern matching is supported. Z matches any digit from 1-9 N matches any digit from 2-9 X matches any digit from 0-9.
FWD Whitelist	Calls from users in the forward whitelist will not be forwarded. Pattern matching is supported. Z matches any digit from 1-9 N matches any digit from 2-9 X matches any digit from 0-9.
CC Settings
Enable CC	If enabled, UCM630X will automatically alert this extension when a called party is available, given that a previous call to that party failed for some reason. By default, it is disabled.
CC Mode	Two modes for Call Completion are supported: Normal: This extension is used as an ordinary extension. For Trunk: This extension is registered from a PBX. The default setting is “Normal”.
CC Max Agents	Configure the maximum number of CCSS agents which may be allocated for this channel. In other words, this number serves as the maximum number of CC requests this channel can make. The minimum value is 1.
CC Max Monitors	Configure the maximum number of monitor structures that may be created for this device. In other words, this number tells how many callers may request CC services for a specific device at one time. The minimum value is 1.
Ring Simultaneously
Ring Simultaneously	Enable this option to have an external number ring simultaneously along with the extension. If a register trunk is used for outbound, the register number will be used to be displayed for the external number as the caller ID number.
External Number	Set the external number to ring simultaneously. ‘-’ is the connection character that will be ignored. This field accepts only letters, numbers, and special characters + = * #.
Time Condition for Ring Simultaneously	Ring the external number simultaneously along with the extension based on this time condition.
Use callee DOD on FWD or RS	Use the DOD number when calls are being diverted/forwarded to external destinations or when ring simultaneous is configured.
Monitor privilege control
Allowed to call-barging	Add members from “Available Extensions” to “Selected Extensions” so that the selected extensions can spy on the used extension using feature code.
Seamless transfer privilege control
Allowed to seamless transfer	Any extensions on the UCM can perform a seamless transfer. When using the Pickup Incall feature, only extensions available on the “Selected Extensions” list can perform a seamless transfer to the edited extension.
Other Settings
Ring Timeout	Configure the number of seconds to ring the user before the call is forwarded to voicemail (voicemail is enabled) or hang up (voicemail is disabled). If not specified, the default ring timeout is 60 seconds on the UCM630X, which can be configured in the global ring timeout setting under Web GUI 🡪 PBX Settings 🡪 Voice Prompt 🡪 Custom Prompt: General Preference. The valid range is between 3 seconds and 600 seconds. Note: If the endpoint also has a ring timeout configured, the actual ring timeout used is the shortest time set by either device.
Auto Record	Enable automatic recording for the calls using this extension. The default setting is disabled. The recordings can be accessed under Web GUI🡪CDR🡪Recording Files.
Skip Trunk Auth	If set to “yes”, users can skip entering the password when making outbound calls. If set to “By Time”, users can skip entering the password when making outbound calls during the selected time condition. If set to “No”, users will be asked to enter the password when making outbound calls.
Time Condition for Skip Trunk Auth	If ‘Skip Trunk Auth’ is set to ‘By Time’, select a time condition during which users can skip entering a password when making outbound calls.
Dial Trunk Password	Configure personal password when making outbound calls via the trunk.
Enable LDAP	If enabled, the extension will be added to the LDAP Phonebook PBX list.
Bind PMS Room	If enabled, the system will create a room whose room number, by default, will equal the extension number in the PMS module. Note: If this room already exists, the configuration of the existing room will be overwritten.
Music On Hold	Specify which Music On Hold class to suggest to the bridged channel when putting them on hold.
Call Duration Limit	The maximum duration of call-blocking.
Maximum Call Duration	The maximum call duration (in seconds). The default value 0 means no limit.
Call Waiting	If disabled, UCM will not invite the extension when it is already in a call and will do the same work as the user is busy. Note: the option only works when the caller dials the extension directly.

Batch Add IAX Extensions

Under Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Extensions, click on “Add”, then select extension type as IAX Extension and the add method to be Batch.

General
Create Number	Specify the number of extensions to be added. The default setting is 5.
Extension Incrementation	Select how much to increment successive extensions. For example, if the value is 2, the extensions will be 1000,1002,1004, ……
Extension	The extension number associated with this particular user/phone.
Permission	Assign permission level to the user. The available permissions are “Internal”, “Local”, “National” and “International” from the lowest level to the highest level. The default setting is “Internal”. Note: Users need to have the same level as or higher level than an outbound rule’s privilege to make outbound calls from this rule.
CallerID Number	Configure the Caller ID number displayed when dialing calls from this user. Note: The Caller ID usage might be limited by your VoIP provider. In Batch Add Method, “e” means to use the extension as the number.
Voicemail	Configure Voicemail. There are three valid options and the default option is “Enable Local Voicemail”. Disable Voicemail: Disable Voicemail. Enable Local Voicemail: Enable voicemail for the user.
SIP/IAX Password	Configure the SIP/IAX password for the users. Three options are available to create a password for the batch of extensions. User Random Password. A random secure password will be automatically generated. It is recommended to use this password for security purposes. Use Extension as Password. Enter a password to be used on all the extensions in the batch.
Voicemail Password	Configure Voicemail password (digits only) for the users. User Random Password. A random password in digits will be automatically generated. It is recommended to use this password for security purposes. Use Extension as Password. Enter a password to be used on all the extensions in the batch.
Send Voicemail to Email	Send voicemail messages to the configured email address. If set to “Default”, the global setting will be used. Global settings can be found in Voicemail 🡪 Voicemail Email Settings.
Keep Voicemail after Emailing	Only applies if extension-level or global Send Voicemail to Email is enabled.
Auto Record	Enable automatic recording for the calls using this extension. The default setting is disabled. The recording files can be accessed under Web GUI🡪CDR🡪Recording Files.
Skip Voicemail Password Verification	When a user dials voicemail code, the password verification IVR is skipped. If enabled, this would allow one-button voicemail access. By default, this option is disabled.
Disable This Extension	Check this box to disable this extension.
Language	Select voice prompt language for this extension. If set to “Default”, the global setting for voice prompt language will be used.
IAX Settings
Max Number of Calls	Configure the maximum number of calls allowed for each remote IP address.
Require Call Token	Configure to enable/disable requiring call token. If set to “Auto”, it might lock out users who depend on backward compatibility when peer authentication credentials are shared between physical endpoints. The default setting is “Yes”.
SRTP	Enable/disable SRTP for RTP stream encryption.
ACL Policy	Access Control List manages the IP addresses that can register to this extension. Allow All: Any IP address can register to this extension. Local Network: Only IP addresses in the configured network segments can register to this extension.
Codec Preference	Configure the codecs to be used.
Call Transfer
Call Forward Unconditional	Enable and configure the Call Forward Unconditional target number.
CFU Time Condition	Select time condition for Call Forward Unconditional. CFU takes effect only during the selected time condition. The available time conditions are “Office Time”, “Out of Office Time”, “Holiday”, “Out of Holiday”, “Out of Office Time or Holiday”, and “Specific”. Note: “Specific” has higher priority to “Office Times” if there is a conflict in terms of time period. Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for a specific time. Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page System Settings🡪Time Settings🡪Office Time/Holiday page.
Call Forward No Answer	Configure the Call Forward No Answer target number.
CFN Time Condition	Select time condition for Call Forward No Answer. The available time conditions are “Office Time”, “Out of Office Time”, “Holiday”, “Out of Holiday”, “Out of Office Time or Holiday”, and “Specific”. Notes: “Specific” has higher priority to “Office Times” if there is a conflict in terms of time period. Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for a specific time. Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page System Settings🡪Time Settings🡪Office Time/Holiday page.
Call Forward Busy	Configure the Call Forward Busy target number.
CFB Time Condition	Select time condition for Call Forward Busy. The available time conditions are “Office Time”, “Out of Office Time”, “Holiday”, “Out of Holiday”, “Out of Office Time or Holiday”, and “Specific”. Notes: “Specific” has higher priority to “Office Times” if there is a conflict in terms of time period. Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for a specific time. Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page System Settings🡪Time Settings🡪Office Time/Holiday page.
Do Not Disturb	If Do Not Disturb is enabled, all incoming calls will be dropped. All call forward settings will be ignored.
DND Time Condition	Select time condition for Do Not Disturb. The available time conditions are “Office Time”, “Out of Office Time”, “Holiday”, “Out of Holiday”, “Out of Office Time or Holiday”, and “Specific”. Notes: “Specific” has higher priority to “Office Times” if there is a conflict in terms of time period. Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for a specific time. Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page System Settings🡪Time Settings🡪Office Time/Holiday page.
DND Whitelist	If DND is enabled, calls from the whitelisted numbers will not be rejected. Multiple numbers are supported and must be separated by new lines. Pattern matching is supported. Z match any digit from 1-9， N match any digit from 2-9， X match any digit from 0-9.
FWD Whitelist	Calls from users in the forward whitelist will not be forwarded. Pattern matching is supported. Z match any digit from 1-9， N match any digit from 2-9， X match any digit from 0-9.
Ring Simultaneously
Ring Simultaneously	Enable this option to have an external number ring simultaneously along with the extension. If a register trunk is used for outbound, the register number will be used to be displayed for the external number as the caller ID number.
External Number	Set the external number to ring simultaneously. ‘-’ is the connection character that will be ignored. This field accepts only letters, numbers, and special characters + = * #.
Time Condition for Ring Simultaneously	Ring the external number simultaneously along with the extension based on this time condition.
Use callee DOD on FWD or RS	Use the DOD number when calls are being diverted/forwarded to external destinations or when ring simultaneous is configured.
Monitor privilege control
Allowed to call-barging	Add members from “Available Extensions” to “Selected Extensions” so that the selected extensions can spy on the used extension using feature code.
Seamless transfer privilege control
Allowed to seamless transfer	Any extensions on the UCM can perform a seamless transfer. When using the Pickup Incall feature, only extensions available on the “Selected Extensions” list can perform a seamless transfer to the edited extension.
Other Settings
Ring Timeout	Configure the number of seconds to ring the user before the call is forwarded to voicemail (voicemail is enabled) or hang up (voicemail is disabled). If not specified, the default ring timeout is 60 seconds on the UCM630X, which can be configured in the global ring timeout setting under Web GUI🡪PBX Settings🡪Voice Prompt🡪Custom Prompt: General Preference. The valid range is between 5 seconds and 600 seconds. Note: If the endpoint also has a ring timeout configured, the actual ring timeout used is the shortest time set by either device.
Auto Record	Enable automatic recording for the calls using this extension. The default setting is disabled. The recordings can be accessed under Web GUI🡪CDR🡪Recording Files.
Skip Trunk Auth	If set to “yes”, users can skip entering the password when making outbound calls. If set to “By Time”, users can skip entering the password when making outbound calls during the selected time condition. If set to “No”, users will be asked to enter the password when making outbound calls.
Time Condition for Skip Trunk Auth	If ‘Skip Trunk Auth’ is set to ‘By Time’, select a time condition during which users can skip entering a password when making outbound calls.
Dial Trunk Password	Configure personal password when making outbound calls via the trunk.
Enable LDAP	If enabled, the extension will be added to the LDAP Phonebook PBX list.
Music On Hold	Specify which Music On Hold class to suggest to the bridged channel when putting them on hold.
Call Duration Limit	Check to enable and set the call limit the duration.
Maximum Call Duration (s)	The maximum call duration (in seconds). The default value 0 means no limit. Max value is 86400 seconds

Batch Extension Resetting Functionality

Users can select multiple extensions and reset their settings to default by pressing the reset button and confirming the reset functionality. Once done, all settings on the Basic Settings page will be restored to default values except for Concurrent Registrations. User voicemail password will be reset to Random Password. User voicemail prompts and recordings will be deleted. User Management settings will also be restored to default except for usernames and custom privileges

Search and Edit Extension

All the UCM630X extensions are listed under Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Extensions, with status, Extension, CallerID Name, Technology (SIP, IAX, and FXS), IP and Port. Each extension has a checkbox for users to “Edit” or “Delete”. Also, options “Edit” , “Reboot” and “Delete” are available per extension. Users can search for an extension by specifying the extension number to find an extension quickly.

• Status

Users can see the following icon for each extension to indicate the SIP status.

Green: Idle

Blue: Ringing

Yellow: In Use

Grey: Unavailable (the extension is not registered or disabled on the PBX)

• Edit single extension

Click on to start editing the extension parameters.

• Reset single extension

Click on to reset the extension parameters to default (except concurrent registration).

Other settings will be restored to default in Maintenance🡪User Management🡪User Information except for username and permissions and delete the user voicemail prompt and voice messages.

• Reboot the user

Click on to send NOTIFY reboot event to the device which has a UCM630X extension already registered. To successfully reboot the user, “Zero Config” needs to be enabled on the UCM630X Web GUI🡪Device Management🡪Zero Config🡪Zero Config Settings.

• Delete single extension

Click on to delete the extension. Or select the checkbox of the extension and then click on “Delete Selected Extensions”.

• Modify selected extensions

Select the checkbox for the extension(s). Then click on “Edit” to edit the extensions in a batch.

• Delete selected extensions

Select the checkbox for the extension(s). Then click on “Delete ” to delete the extension(s).

Export Extensions

The extensions configured on the UCM630X can be exported to a CSV format file with selected technology “SIP”, “IAX” or “FXS”. Click on the “Export Extensions” button and select technology in the prompt below.

Export Basic Information includes:

• Extension
• CallerID Number
• Privilege
• SIP/IAX Password
• AuthID
• Voicemail
• Voicemail Password
• Sync Contact
• First Name
• Last Name
• Email Address
• User/Wave Password

If importing extensions with no values for settings, the following will occur:

• If importing new extensions, or if Replace is selected as the duplicate import option, the default values for those settings will be used.
• If Update is selected as the duplicate import option, no changes will be made to the existing settings.

The exported CSV file can serve as a template for users to fill in desired extension information to be imported to the UCM630X.

Import Extensions

The capability to import extensions to the UCM630X provides users the flexibility to batch add extensions with similar or different configurations quickly into the PBX system.

1. Export extension CSV file from the UCM630X by clicking on the “Export Extensions” button.
2. Fill up the extension information you would like in the exported CSV template.
3. Click on the “Import Extensions” button. The following dialog will be prompted.

4. Select the option in “On Duplicate Extension” to define how the duplicate extension(s) in the imported CSV file should be treated by the PBX.

• Skip: Duplicate extensions in the CSV file will be skipped. The PBX will keep the current extension information as previously configured without change.
• Delete and Recreate: The current extension previously configured will be deleted and the duplicate extension in the CSV file will be loaded to the PBX.
• Update Information: The current extension previously configured in the PBX will be kept. However, if the duplicate extension in the CSV file has a different configuration for any options, it will override the configuration for those options in the extension.

5. Click on “Choose file to upload” to select a CSV file from a local directory on the PC.
6. Click on “Apply Changes” to apply the imported file on the UCM630X.

Example of a file to import:

Field	Supported Values
Extension	Digits
Technology	SIP/SIP(WebRTC)
Enable Voicemail	yes/no/remote
CallerID Number	Digits
SIP/IAX Password	Alphanumeric characters
Voicemail Password	Digits
Skip Voicemail Password Verification	yes/no
Ring Timeout	Empty/ 3 to 600 (in second)
SRTP	yes/no
Strategy	Allow All/Local Subnet Only/A Specific IP Address
Local Subnet 1	IP address/Mask
Local Subnet 2	IP address/Mask
Local Subnet 3	IP address/Mask
Local Subnet 4	IP address/Mask
Local Subnet 5	IP address/Mask
Local Subnet 6	IP address/Mask
Local Subnet 7	IP address/Mask
Local Subnet 8	IP address/Mask
Local Subnet 9	IP address/Mask
Local Subnet 10	IP address/Mask
Specific IP Address	IP address
Skip Trunk Auth	yes/no/bytime
Codec Preference	PCMU,PCMA,GSM,G.726,G.722,G.729,H.264,ILBC,AAL2-G.726-32,ADPCM,G.723,H.263,H.263p,vp8,opus
Permission	Internal/Local/National/International
NAT	yes/no
DTMF Mode	RFC4733/info/inband/auto
Insecure	Port
Enable Keep-alive	Yes/no
Keep-alive Frequency	Value from 1-3600
AuthID	Alphanumeric value without special characters
TEL URI	Disabled/user=phone/enabled
Call Forward Busy	Digits
Call Forward No Answer	Digits
Call Forward Unconditional	Digits
Support Hot-Desking Mode	Yes/no
Dial Trunk Password	Digits
Disable This Extension	Yes/no
CFU Time Condition	All time/Office time/out of office time/holiday/out of holiday/out of office time or holiday/specific time
CFN Time Condition	All time/Office time/out of office time/holiday/out of holiday/out of office time or holiday/specific time
CFB Time Condition	All time/Office time/out of office time/holiday/out of holiday/out of office time or holiday/specific time
Music On Hold	Default/ringbacktone_default
CC Agent Policy	If CC is disabled use: never If CC is set to normal use: generic If CC is set to trunk use: native
CC Monitor Policy	Generic/never
CCBS Available Timer	3600/4800
CCNR Available Timer	3600/7200
CC Offer Timer	60/120
CC Max Agents	Value from 1-999
CC Max Monitors	Value from 1-999
Ring simultaneously	Yes/no
External Number	Digits
Time Condition for Ring Simultaneously	All time/Office time/out of office time/holiday/out of holiday/out of office time or holiday/specific time
Time Condition for Skip Trunk Auth	All time/Office time/out of office time/holiday/out of holiday/out of office time or holiday/specific time
Enable LDAP	Yes/no
Enable T.38 UDPTL	Yes/no
Max Contacts	Values from 1-10
Enable Wave	Yes/no
Alert-Info	None/Ring 1/Ring2/Ring3/Ring 4/Ring 5/Ring 6/Ring 7/ Ring 8/Ring 9/Ring 10/bellcore-dr1/bellcore-dr2/ bellcore-dr3/ bellcore-dr4/ bellcore-dr5/custom
Do Not Disturb	Yes/no
DND Time Condition	All time/Office time/out of office time/holiday/out of holiday/out of office time or holiday/specific time
Custom Auto answer	Yes/no
Do Not Disturb Whitelist	Empty/digits
User Password	Alphanumeric characters.
First Name	Alphanumeric without special characters.
Last Name	Alphanumeric without special characters.
Email Address	Email address
Language	Default/en/zh
Phone Number	Digits
Call-Barging Monitor	Extensions allowed to call barging
Seamless Transfer Members	Extensions allowed to seamless transfer

Field	Supported Values
Extension	Digits
Technology	IAX
Enable Voicemail	yes/no
CallerID Number	Digits
SIP/IAX Password	Alphanumeric characters
Voicemail Password	Digits
Skip Voicemail Password Verification	yes/no
Ring Timeout	Empty/ 3 to 600 (in second)
SRTP	yes/no
Strategy	Allow All/Local Subnet Only/A Specific IP Address
Local Subnet 1	IP address/Mask
Local Subnet 2	IP address/Mask
Local Subnet 3	IP address/Mask
Local Subnet 4	IP address/Mask
Local Subnet 5	IP address/Mask
Local Subnet 6	IP address/Mask
Local Subnet 7	IP address/Mask
Local Subnet 8	IP address/Mask
Local Subnet 9	IP address/Mask
Local Subnet 10	IP address/Mask
Specific IP Address	IP address
Skip Trunk Auth	yes/no/bytime
Codec Preference	PCMU,PCMA,GSM,G.726,G.722,G.729,H.264,ILBC,AAL2-G.726-32,ADPCM,G.723,H.263,H.263p,vp8,opus
Permission	Internal/Local/National/International
NAT	yes/no
Call Forward Busy	Digits
Call Forward No Answer	Digits
Call Forward Unconditional	Digits
Require Call Token	Yes/no/auto
Max Number of Calls	Values from 1-512
Dial Trunk Password	Digits
Disable This Extension	Yes/no
CFU Time Condition	All time/Office time/out of office time/holiday/out of holiday/out of office time or holiday/specific time
CFN Time Condition
CFB Time Condition	All time/Office time/out of office time/holiday/out of holiday/out of office time or holiday/specific time
Music On Hold	Default/ringbacktone_default
Ring simultaneously	Yes/no
External Number	Digits
Time Condition for Ring Simultaneously	All time/Office time/out of office time/holiday/out of holiday/out of office time or holiday/specific time
Time Condition for Skip Trunk Auth	All time/Office time/out of office time/holiday/out of holiday/out of office time or holiday/specific time
Enable LDAP	Yes/no
Limit Max time (s)	empty
Do Not Disturb	Yes/no
DND Time Condition	All time/Office time/out of office time/holiday/out of holiday/out of office time or holiday/specific time
Do Not Disturb Whitelist	Empty/digits
User Password	Alphanumeric characters.
First Name	Alphanumeric without special characters.
Last Name	Alphanumeric without special characters.
Email Address	Email address
Language	Default/en/zh
Phone Number	Digits
Call-Barging Monitor	Extensions allowed to call barging
Seamless Transfer Members	Extensions allowed to seamless transfer

Field	Supported Values
Extension	Digits
Technology	FXS
Analog Station	FXS1/FXS2
Enable Voicemail	yes/no
CallerID Number	Digits
Voicemail Password	Digits
Skip Voicemail Password Verification	yes/no
Ring Timeout	Empty/ 3 to 600 (in second)
Auto Record	yes/no
Fax Mode	None/Fax Gateway/Fax Detection
Skip Trunk Auth	Yes/no/bytime
Permission	Internal/Local/National/International
Call Forward Busy	Digits
Call Forward No Answer	Digits
Call Forward Unconditional	Digits
Call Waiting	Yes/no
Use # as SEND	Yes/no
RX Gain	Values from -30🡪6
TX Gain	Values from -30🡪6
MIN RX Flash	Values from: 30 – 1000
MAX RX Flash	Values from: 40 – 2000
Enable Polarity Reversal	Yes/no
Echo Cancellation	On/Off/32/64/128/256/512/1024
3-Way Calling	Yes/no
Send CallerID After	1/2
Dial Trunk Password	digits
Disable This Extension	Yes/no
CFU Time Condition	All time/Office time/out of office time/holiday/out of holiday/out of office time or holiday/specific time
CFN Time Condition	All time/Office time/out of office time/holiday/out of holiday/out of office time or holiday/specific time
CFB Time Condition	All time/Office time/out of office time/holiday/out of holiday/out of office time or holiday/specific time
Music On Hold	Default/ringbacktone_default
CC Agent Policy	If CC is disabled use: never If CC is set to normal use: generic If CC is set to trunk use: native
CC Monitor Policy	Generic/never
CCBS Available Timer	3600/4800
CCNR Available Timer	3600/7200
CC Offer Timer	60/120
CC Max Agents	Value from 1-999
CC Max Monitors	Value from 1-999
Ring simultaneously	Yes/no
External Number	Digits
Time Condition for Ring Simultaneously	All time/Office time/out of office time/holiday/out of holiday/out of office time or holiday/specific time
Time Condition for Skip Trunk Auth
Enable LDAP	Yes/no
Enable Hotline	Yes/no
Hotline Type	Immediate hotline/delay hotline
Hotline Number	digits
Limit Max time (s)	empty
Do Not Disturb	Yes/no
DND Time Condition	All time/Office time/out of office time/holiday/out of holiday/out of office time or holiday/specific time
Do Not Disturb Whitelist	Empty/digits
User Password	Alphanumeric characters.
First Name	Alphanumeric without special characters.
Last Name	Alphanumeric without special characters.
Email Address	Email address
Language	Default/en/zh
Phone Number	Digits
Call-Barging Monitor	Extensions allowed to call barging
Seamless Transfer Members	Extensions allowed to seamless transfer

The CSV file should contain all the above fields, if one of them is missing or empty, the UCM630X will display the following error message for missing fields.

Extension Details

Users can click on an extension number in the Extensions list page and quickly view information about it such as:

• Extension: This shows the Extension number.
• Status: This shows the status of the extension.
• Presence status: Indicates the Presence Status of this extension.
• Terminal Type: This shows the type of the terminal using this extension (SIP, FXS…etc.).
• Caller ID Name: Reveals the Caller ID Name configured on the extension.
• Messages: Shows the messages’ stats.
• IP and Port: The IP address and the ports of the device using the extension.
• Email status: Show the Email status (sent, to be sent…etc.).
• Ring Group: Indicates the ring groups that this extension belongs to.
• Call Queue: Indicates the Cal Queues that this extension belongs to.
• Call Queue (Dynamic): Indicates the Call Queues that this extension belongs to as a dynamic agent.

E-mail Notification

Once the extensions are created with Email addresses, the PBX administrator can click on the button “E-mail Notification” to send the account registration and configuration information to the user. Please make sure the Email setting under Web GUI🡪System Settings🡪Email Settings is properly configured and tested on the UCM630X before using “E-mail Notification”.

When clicking on ”More” > “E-mail Notification” button, the following message will be prompted on the web page. Click on OK to confirm sending the account information to all users’ Email addresses.

The user will receive an Email including account registration information as well as the Wave Settings with the QR code:

The UCM admin can also send “Remote Registration Mail” and “Wave Welcome Mail” as the figure below shows

Multiple Registrations per Extension

UCM630X supports multiple registrations per extension so that users can use the same extension on devices in different locations.

This feature can be enabled by configuring the option “Concurrent Registrations” under Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Edit Extension. The default value is set to 3 registrations. The maximum is 10. When the option “1(allowed to seize) is selected, the UCM will allow newer registration attempts to seize the extension from a previously registered endpoint. To prevent this behaviour, please select the option 1.

SMS Message Support

The UCM630X provides built-in SIP SMS message support. For SIP end devices such as Grandstream GXP or GXV phones that support SIP message, after a UCM630X account is registered on the end device, the user can send and receive SMS messages. Please refer to the end device documentation on how to send and receive SMS messages.

EXTENSION GROUPS

The UCM630X extension group feature allows users to assign and categorize extensions in different groups to better manage the configurations on the UCM630X. For example, when configuring “Enable Filter on Source Caller ID”, users could select a group instead of each person’s extension to assign. This feature simplifies the configuration process and helps manage and categorize the extensions for a business environment.

Configure Extension Groups

Extension groups can be configured via Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Extension Groups.

• Click on to create a new extension group.
• Click on to edit the extension group.
• Click on to delete the extension group.

Select extensions from the list on the left side to the right side.

Click on to change the ringing priority of the members selected on the group.

Using Extension Groups

Here is an example where the extension group can be used. Go to Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Outbound Routes and select “Enable Filter on Source Caller ID”. Both single extensions and extension groups will show up for users to select.

ANALOG TRUNKS

Go to Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Analog Trunks to add and edit analog trunks.

• Click on “Create New Analog Trunk” to add a new analog trunk.
• Click on to edit the analog trunk.
• Click on to delete the analog trunk.

Analog Trunk Configuration

The analog trunk options are listed in the table below.

FXO Port	Select the channel for the analog trunk. UCM6301: 1 channel UCM6302: 2 channels UCM6304: 4 channels UCM6308: 8 channels
Trunk Name	Specify a unique label to identify the trunk when listed in outbound rules, incoming rules, etc.
Advanced Options
SLA Mode	Enable this option to satisfy two primary use cases, which include emulating a simple key system and creating shared extensions on a PBX. Enable SLA Mode will disable polarity reversal.
Barge Allowed	The barge option specifies whether other stations can join a call in progress on this trunk. If enabled, the other stations can press the line button to join the call. The default setting is Yes.
Hold Access	The hold option specifies hold permissions for this trunk. If set to “Open”, any station can place this trunk on hold and any other station is allowed to retrieve the call. If set to “Private”, only the station that places the call on hold can retrieve the call. The default setting is Yes.
Enable Polarity Reversal	If enabled, a polarity reversal will be marked as received when an outgoing call is answered by the remote party. For some countries, a polarity reversal is used for signaling the disconnection of a phone line and the call will be considered as “Hangup” on a polarity reversal. The default setting is “No”.
Polarity on Answer Delay	When the FXO port answers the call, FXS may send a Polarity Reversal. If this interval is shorter than the value of “Polarity on Answer Delay”, the Polarity Reversal will be ignored. Otherwise, the FXO will On-hook to disconnect the call. The default setting is 600ms.
Current Disconnect Threshold (ms)	This is the periodic time (in ms) that the UCM630X will use to check on a voltage drop in the line. The default setting is 200. The valid range is 50 to 3000.
Ring Timeout	Configure the ring timeout (in ms). Trunk (FXO) devices must have a timeout to determine if there was a Hangup before the line is answered. This value can be used to configure how long it takes before the UCM630X considers a non-ringing line with Hangup activity. The default setting is 8000.
RX Gain	Configure the RX gain for the receiving channel of the analog FXO port. The valid range is from -13.5 (dB) to + 12.0 (dB). The default setting is 0.
TX Gain	Configure the TX gain for the transmitting channel of the analog FXO port. The valid range is from -13.5 (dB) to + 12.0 (dB). The default setting is 0.
Use CallerID	Configure to enable CallerID detection. The default setting is “Yes”.
Caller ID Scheme	Select the Caller ID scheme for this trunk. Bellcore/Telcordia. ETSI-FSK During Ringing ETSI-FSK Prior to Ringing with DTAS ETSI-FSK Prior to Ringing with LR ETSI-FSK Prior to Ringing with RP ETSI-DTMF During Ringing ETSI-DTMF Prior to Ringing with DTAS ETSI-DTMF Prior to Ringing with LR ETSI-DTMF Prior to Ringing with RP SIN 227-BT NTT Japan Auto-Detect If you are not sure which scheme to choose, please select “Auto Detect”. The default setting is “Bellcore/Telcordia”.
Fax Mode	Configures how faxes to this extension will be handled. None: Faxes will not be processed. Fax Gateway: Faxes to this extension will be processed and converted from T.30 to T.38 or vice-versa. FXS/FXO ports only. The default setting is None.
FXO Dial Delay (ms)	Configure the time interval between off-hook and first dialed digit for outbound calls.
Auto Record	Enable automatic recording for the calls using this trunk. The default setting is disabled. The recording files can be accessed under Web GUI🡪CDR🡪Recording Files.
Disable This Trunk	If selected, the trunk will be disabled, and incoming/Outgoing calls via this trunk will not be possible.
DAHDI Out Line Selection	This is to implement an analog trunk outbound line selection strategy. Three options are available: Ascend When the call goes out from this analog trunk, it will always try to use the first idle FXO port. The port order that the call will use to go out if UCM6302 is used would be port 1🡪port 2🡪. Every time it will start with port 1 (if it is idle). Poll When the call goes out from this analog trunk, it will use the port that is not used last time. And it will always use the port in the order of port 1🡪2🡪1🡪2🡪1🡪2🡪…, following the last port being used in case UCM6302, is used. Descend When the call goes out from this analog trunk, it will always try to use the last idle FXO port. The port order that the call will use to go out if UCM6302 is used would be port 2🡪port 1. Every time it will start with port 2 (if it is idle). The default setting is “Ascend” mode.
Echo Cancellation Mode	The Non-Linear Processing (NLP) in echo cancellation helps to remove/suppress residual echo components that could not be removed by the LEC (Line Echo Canceller). Following modes are supported: Default: The NLP limits the signal level to the background noise level when active, and the background noise level adjustment is low. High Noise Level Adjustment: The NLP limits the signal level to the background noise level when active, and the background noise level adjustment is high. Noise Masking: The NLP sends sign noise when active, and the background noise level adjustment is high. White Noise Injection: The NLP injects white noise when active. The level corresponds to the background noise level at Sin, and the background noise level adjustment is high.
Direct Callback	Allows external numbers the option to get directed to the extension that last called them. For Example, User 2002 has dialed external number 061234575 but they were not reachable, once they have received missed call notification on their phone, they would mostly call back the number, if the option “Direct Callback” is enabled then they will be directly bridged to user 2002 regardless of the configured inbound destination.
Tone Settings
Busy Detection	Busy Detection is used to detect far-end Hangup or for detecting busy signal. The default setting is “Yes”.
Busy Tone Count	If “Busy Detection” is enabled, users can specify the number of busy tones to be played before hanging up. The default setting is 2. Better results might be achieved if set to 4, 6, or even 8. Please note that the higher the number is, the more time is needed to Hangup the channel. However, this might lower the probability to get a random Hangup.
Congestion Detection	Congestion detection is used to detect far-end congestion signal. The default setting is “Yes”.
Congestion Count	If “Congestion Detection” is enabled, users can specify the number of congestion tones to wait for. The default setting is 2.
Tone Country	Select the country for tone settings. If “Custom” is selected, users could manually configure the values for Busy Tone and Congestion Tone. The default setting is “United States of America (USA)”.
Busy Tone	Syntax: f1=val[@level][,f2=val[@level]],c=on1/off1[-on2/off2[-on3/off3]]; Frequencies are in Hz and cadence on and off are in ms. Frequencies Range: [0, 4000) Busy Level Range: (-300, 0) Cadence Range: [0, 16383]. Select Tone Country “Custom” to manually configure Busy Tone value. Default value: f1=480@-50,f2=620@-50,c=500/500
Congestion Tone	Syntax: f1=val[@level][,f2=val[@level]],c=on1/off1[-on2/off2[-on3/off3]]; Frequencies are in Hz and cadence on and off are in ms. Frequencies Range: [0, 4000) Busy Level Range: (-300, 0) Cadence Range: [0, 16383]. Select Tone Country “Custom” to manually configure Busy Tone value. Default value: f1=480@-50,f2=620@-50,c=250/250
PSTN Detection	Click on “Detect” to detect the busy tone, Polarity Reversal, and Current Disconnect by PSTN. Before the detection, please make sure there is more than one channel configured and working properly. If the detection has a busy tone, the “Tone Country” option will be set as “Custom”.

PSTN Detection

The UCM630X provides a PSTN detection function to help users detect the busy tone, Polarity Reversal, and Current Disconnect by making a call from the PSTN line to another destination. The detecting call will be answered and up for about 1 minute. Once done, the detecting result will show and can be used for the UCM630X settings.

1. Go to UCM630X Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Analog Trunks page.
2. Click to edit the analog trunk created for the FXO port.
3. In the window to edit the analog trunk, go to the “Tone Settings” section and there are two methods to set the busy tone.

• Tone Country. The default setting is “United States of America (USA)”.
• PSTN Detection.

4. Click on “Detect” to start PSTN detection.

If there are two FXO ports connected to PSTN lines, use the following settings for auto-detection.

• Detect Model: Auto Detect.
• Source Channel: The source channel to be detected.
• Destination Channel: The channel to help detect. For example, the second FXO port.
• Destination Number: The number to be dialed for detecting. This number must be the actual PSTN number for the FXO port used as the destination channel.

If there is only one FXO port connected to the PSTN line, use the following settings for auto-detection.

• Detect Model: Semi-auto Detect.
• Source Channel: The source channel to be detected.
• Destination Number: The number to be dialed for detecting. This number could be a cell phone number or another PSTN number that can be reached from the source channel PSTN number.

5. Click “Detect” to start detecting. The source channel will initiate a call to the destination number. For “Auto Detect”, the call will be automatically answered. For “Semi-auto Detect”, the UCM630X Web GUI will display a prompt to notify the user to answer or hang up the call to finish the detecting process.
6. Once done, the detected result will show. Users could save the detecting result as the current UCM630X settings.

PSTN Detection for Analog Trunk

VOIP TRUNKS

VoIP Trunk Configuration

VoIP trunks can be configured in UCM630X under Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪VoIP Trunks. Once created, the VoIP trunks will be listed with Provider Name, Type, Hostname/IP, Username, and Options to edit/detect the trunk.

• Click on “Add SIP Trunk” or “Add IAX Trunk” to add a new VoIP trunk.
• Click on to configure detailed parameters for the VoIP trunk.
• Click on to configure Direct Outward Dialing (DOD) for the SIP Trunk.
• Click on to start LDAP Sync.
• Click on to delete the VoIP trunk.

The VoIP trunk options are listed in the table below.

Create New IAX Trunk

Trunk Groups

Users can create VoIP Trunk Groups to register and easily apply the same settings on multiple accounts within the same SIP server. This can drastically reduce the amount of time needed to manage accounts for the same server and improve the overall cleanliness of the web UI.

Once creating the new trunk group and configuring the SIP settings, users can add multiple accounts within the configured SIP server by pressing the button and configuring the username, password, and authentication ID fields.

Direct Outward Dialing (DOD)

The UCM630X provides Direct Outward Dialing (DOD), which is a service of a local phone company (or local exchange carrier) that allows subscribers within a company’s PBX system to connect to outside lines directly.

Example of how DOD is used:

Company ABC has a SIP trunk. This SIP trunk has 4 DIDs associated with it. The main number of the office is routed to an auto attendant. The other three numbers are direct lines to specific users of the company. Now when a user makes an outbound call their caller ID shows up as the main office number. This poses a problem, as the CEO would like their calls to come from their direct line. This can be accomplished by configuring DOD for the CEO’s extension.

Steps to configure DOD on the UCM630X:

1. To setup DOD go to UCM630X Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪VoIP Trunks page.
2. Click to access the DOD options for the selected SIP Trunk.
3. Click “Add DOD” to begin your DOD setup
4. Enter a SIP trunk DID number in the “DOD number” field. In this example, ABC company has a total of 4 DID numbers. Enter the phone number used by the CEO here.
5. When adding extensions, you can choose whether to “Enable Strip” according to your needs. If it is enabled, you can configure the number (0-64) that will be stripped from the extension number before being added to the DOD number. For example, if the entered digit is 2, and the DOD number for extension 4002 is 1122, then dialing out from 4002, 112202 will be used as the caller ID (DOD).
6. Select an extension from the “Available Extensions” list. Users have the option of selecting more than one extension. In this case, Company ABC would select the CEO’s extension. After making the selection, click on the button to move the extension(s) to the “Selected Extensions” list.

7. Click “Save” at the bottom.

Once completed, the user will return to the EDIT DOD page that shows all the extensions that are associated with a particular DOD.

: Add a DOD.
: Import DODs using a csv file.
: Export the DODs using a csv file.
: Filter DODs by number or name.

For DOD importing, please refer to the screenshot below for the template used.

WEBRTC TRUNKS

WebRTC, Web Real-Time Communication, is a real time audio/video chatting framework that allows real-time audio/video chatting through the web browser. WebRTC usually does not refer to the web application itself but to the set of protocols and practices bundled with a graphical interface. Our UCM63xx supports creating WebRTC trunks to use exclusively with web application, this allows the users to join calls and meetings just by clicking a link to a web page.

Below is a figure that shows the options to configure when setting up this feature:

SLA STATION

The UCM630X supports SLA (Shared Line Appearance) that allows mapping the key with LED on a multi-line phone to different external lines. When there is an incoming call and the phone starts to ring, the LED on the key will flash in red and the call can be picked up by pressing this key. This allows users to know if the line is occupied or not. The SLA function on the UCM630X is like BLF but SLA is used to monitor external lines, i.e., analog trunk on the UCM630X. Users could configure the phone with BLF mode on the MPK to monitor the analog trunk status or press the line key pick-up call from the analog trunk on the UCM630X.

Create/Edit Shared Line Appearance Station

Shared Line Appearance Station can be configured on Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪SLA Station.

• Click on to add an Shared Line Appearance Station.
• Click on to edit the Shared Line Appearance Station. The following table shows the SLA Station configuration parameters.
• Click on to delete the Shared Line Appearance Station.

Station Name	Configure a name to identify the SLA Station.
Station	Specify a SIP extension as a station that will be using SLA.
Available SLA Trunks	Existing Analog Trunks with SLA Mode enabled will be listed here.
Associated SLA Trunks	Select a trunk for this SLA from the Available SLA Trunks list. Click on to arrange the order. If there are multiple trunks selected, when there are calls on those trunks at the same time, pressing the LINE key on the phone will pick up the call on the first trunk here.
SLA Station Options
Ring Timeout	Configure the time (in seconds) to ring the station before the call is considered unanswered. No timeout is set by default. If set to 0, there will be no timeout.
Ring Delay	Configure the time (in seconds) for a delay before ringing the station when a call first comes in on the shared line. No delay is set by default. If set to 0, there will be no delay.
Hold Access	This option defines the competence of the hold action for one particular trunk. If set to “open”, any station could hold a call on that trunk or resume one held session; if set to “private”, only the station that places the trunk call on hold could resume the session. The default setting is “open”.

Sample Configuration

1. On the UCM630X, go to Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Analog Trunks page. Create an analog trunk or edit the existing analog trunk. Make sure “SLA Mode” is enabled for the analog trunk. Once enabled, this analog trunk will be only available for the SLA stations created under Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪SLA Station page.

2. Click on “Save”. The analog trunk will be listed with trunk mode “SLA”.

3. On the UCM630X, go to Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪SLA Station page, click on “Add”. Please refer to section [Create/Edit SLA Station] for the configuration parameters. Users can create one or more SLA stations to monitor the analog trunk. The following figure shows station 1005 associated with FXO1 trunk.

4. On the SIP phone 2, configure to register UCM630X extension 1005. Configure the MPK as BLF mode and the value must be set to “extension_trunkname”, which is 1005_fxo1 in this case.

Now the SLA station is ready to use. The following functions can be achieved by this configuration.

• Making an outbound call from the station/extension, using LINE key

When the extension is in an idle state, press the line key for this extension on the phone to off-hook. Then dial the station’s extension number, for example, dial 1002 on phone 1 (or dial 1005 on phone 2), to hear the dial tone. Then the users could dial an external number for the outbound call.

• Making an outbound call from the station/extension, using the BLF key

When the extension is in an idle state (BLF is lit in green), press the MPK and users could dial external numbers directly.

• Answering call using LINE key

When the station is ringing (BLF is blinking in red), press the LINE key to answer the incoming call.

• Barging-in active call using BLF key

When there is an active call between an SLA station and an external number using the SLA trunk, other SLA stations monitoring the same trunk could join the call by pressing the BLF key if “Barge Allowed” is enabled for the analog trunk.

• Hold/UnHold using BLF key

If the external line is previously put on hold by an SLA station, another station that monitors the same SLA trunk could UnHold the call by pressing the BLF key if “Hold Access” is set to “open” on the analog trunk and the SLA station.

CALL ROUTES

Outbound Routes

In the following sections, we will discuss the steps and parameters used to configure and manage outbound rules in UCM630X, these rules are the regulating points for all external outgoing calls initiated by the UCM through all types of trunks: SIP, Analog, and Digital.

Configuring Outbound Routes

In the UCM630X, an outgoing calling rule pairs an extension pattern with a trunk used to dial the pattern. This allows different patterns to be dialed through different trunks (e.g., “Local” 7-digit dials through an FXO while “Long distance” 10-digit dials through a low-cost SIP trunk). Users can also set up a failover trunk to be used when the primary trunk fails.

Go to Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Outbound Routes to add and edit outbound rules.

• Click on to add a new outbound route.
• Click the “Import” button to upload the outgoing route in .CSV format.
• Click the “Export” button to generate outgoing routes in .CSV format.
• Click to edit the outbound route.
• Click to delete the outbound route.

On the UCM630X, the outbound route priority is based on the “Best matching pattern”. For example, the UCM630X has outbound route A with pattern 1xxx and outbound route B with pattern 10xx configured. When dialing 1000 for an outbound call, outbound route B will always be used first. This is because pattern 10xx is a better match than pattern 1xxx. Only when there are multiple outbound routes with the same pattern configured.

Outbound Rule Name	Configure the name of the calling rule (e.g., local, long_distance, etc.). Letters, digits, _ and – are allowed.
Pattern	All patterns are prefixed by the “_” character, but please do not enter more than one “_” at the beginning. All patterns can add comments, such as “_pattern /* comment */”. In patterns, some characters have special meanings: [12345-9] … Any digit in the brackets. In this example, 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 is allowed. N … Any digit from 2-9. . … Wildcard, matching one or more characters. ! … Wildcard, matching zero or more characters immediately. X … Any digit from 0-9. Z … Any digit from 1-9. – … Hyphen is to connect characters and it will be ignored. [] Contain special characters ([x], [n], [z]) represent letters x, n, z.
Disable This Route	After creating the outbound route, users can choose to enable and disable it. If the route is disabled, it will not take effect anymore. However, the route settings will remain in UCM. Users can enable it again when it is needed.
Password	Configure the password for users to use this rule when making outbound calls.
Local Country Code	If your local country code is affected by the outbound blacklist, please enter it here to bypass the blacklist.
Call Duration Limit	Enable to configure the maximum duration for the call using this outbound route.
Maximum Call Duration	Configure the maximum duration of the call (in seconds). The default setting is 0, which means no limit.
Warning Time	Configure the warning time for the call using this outbound route. If set to x seconds, the warning tone will be played to the caller when x seconds are left to end the call.
Auto Record	If enabled, calls using this route will automatically be recorded.
Warning Repeat Interval	Configure the warning repeat interval for the call using this outbound route. If set to X seconds, the warning tone will be played every x seconds after the first warning.
PIN Groups	Select a PIN Group
PIN Groups with Privilege Level	If enabled and PIN Groups are used, Privilege Levels and Filter on Source Caller ID will also be applied.
Privilege Level	Select privilege level for the outbound rule. Internal: The lowest level required. All users can use this rule. Local: Users with Local, National, or International levels can use this rule. National: Users with National or International levels can use this rule. International: The highest level required. Only users with the international level can use this rule. Disable: The default setting is “Disable”. If selected, only the matched source caller ID will be allowed to use this outbound route. Please be aware of the potential security risks when using the “Internal” level, which means all users can use this outbound rule to dial out from the trunk.
Enable Filter on Source Caller ID	When enabled, users could specify extensions allowed to use this outbound route. “Privilege Level” is automatically disabled if using “Enable Filter on Source Caller ID”. The following two methods can be used at the same time to define the extensions as the source caller ID. Select available extensions/extension groups from the list. This allows users to specify arbitrary single extensions available in the PBX. Custom Dynamic Route: define the pattern for the source caller ID. This allows users to define extension range instead of selecting them one by one. All patterns are prefixed with the “_”. Special characters: X: Any Digit from 0-9. Z: Any Digit from 1-9. N: Any Digit from 2-9. “.“: Wildcard. Match one or more characters. “!“: Wildcard. Match zero or more characters immediately. Example: [12345–9] – Any digit from 1 to 9. Note: Multiple patterns can be used. Patterns should be separated by a comma “,”. Example: _X. , _NNXXNXXXXX, _818X.
Outbound Route CID	Attempt to use the configured outbound route CID. This CID will not be used if DOD is configured.
Send This Call Through Trunk
Trunk	Select the trunk for this outbound rule.
Strip	Allows the user to specify the number of digits that will be stripped from the beginning of the dialed string before the call is placed via the selected trunk. Example: The users will dial 9 as the first digit of long-distance calls. However, 9 should not be sent out via analog lines and the PSTN line. In this case, 1 digit should be stripped before the call is placed.
Prepend	Specify the digits to be prepended before the call is placed via the trunk. Those digits will be prepended after the dialing number is stripped.
Use Failover Trunk
Failover Trunk	Failover trunks can be used to make sure that a call goes through an alternate route when the primary trunk is busy or down. If “Use Failover Trunk” is enabled and “Failover trunk” is defined, the calls that cannot be placed via the regular trunk may have a secondary trunk to go through. UCM630X supports up to 10 failover trunks. Example: The user’s primary trunk is a VoIP trunk, and the user would like to use the PSTN when the VoIP trunk is not available. The PSTN trunk can be configured as the failover trunk of the VoIP trunk.
Strip	Allows the user to specify the number of digits that will be stripped from the beginning of the dialed string before the call is placed via the selected trunk. Example: The users will dial 9 as the first digit of long-distance calls. However, 9 should not be sent out via analog lines and the PSTN line. In this case, 1 digit should be stripped before the call is placed.
Prepend	Specify the digits to be prepended before the call is placed via the trunk. Those digits will be prepended after the dialing number is stripped.
Time Condition
Time Condition Mode	Use Main Trunk or Failover Trunk: Use the Main Trunk and its settings during the configured time conditions. If the main trunk is unavailable, the Failover Trunk and its settings will be used instead. Use Specific Trunks: Use specific trunks during the configured time conditions. The Strip and Prepend settings of the Main Trunk will be used. If a trunk is unavailable during its time condition, no failover trunks will be used.

Failover Trunk Toggles

This option controls whether failover trunks will be used if receiving specific responses to outgoing calls.

If a call receives the selected response codes, the UCM will not be redirect it to the call route’s failover trunk.

Outbound Routes DOD

It is possible to specify DOD number based on Outbound Route, as displayed on the screenshot below. For each outbound route.

Outbound Blacklist

The UCM630X allows users to configure a blacklist for outbound routes. If the dialing number matches the blacklist numbers or patterns, the outbound call will not be allowed. The outbound blacklist can be configured under UCM Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Outbound Routes: Outbound Blacklist.

Users can configure numbers, patterns or select country code to add to the blacklist. Please note that the blacklist settings apply to all outbound routes.

Users can export outbound route blacklists and delete all blacklist entries. Additionally, users can also import blacklists for outbound routes.

Scheduled Sync

The UCM630X allows users to synchronize the outbound routes, this feature can be found on the Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Outbound Routes🡪 Scheduled Sync.

Scheduled Sync	Enable the Scheduled Sync feature
Server Address	Enter the TFTP server address. For example, “192.168.1.2:69”.
File Name	Specify the file name
Sync Time	Enter the sync time (24hr format). The valid range is 0-23.
Sync Frequency	Create new sync every x day(s). The valid range is 1 to 30.

PIN Groups

The UCM630X supports the pin group. Once this feature is configured, users can apply pin groups to specific outbound routes. When placing a call on pin-protected outbound routes, the caller will be asked to input the group pin number, this feature can be found on the Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Outbound Routes🡪PIN Groups.

Name	Specify the name of the group
Record In CDR	Specify whether to enable/disable record in CDR
PIN Number	Specify the code that will be asked once dialing via a trunk
PIN Name	Specify the name of the PIN

Once the user clicks , the following figure shows to configure the new PIN.

The following screenshot shows an example of created PIN Groups and members:

If PIN group is enabled on outbound route level, password, privilege level and enable the filter on source caller ID will be disabled, unless if you check the option “PIN Groups with Privilege Level” where you can use the PIN Groups and Privilege Level or PIN Groups and Enable Filter on Source Caller ID.

If PIN group CDR is enabled, the call with PIN group information will be displayed as part of CDR under the Account Code field.

• Importing PIN Groups from CSV files:

Users can also import PIN Groups by uploading CSV files for each group. To do this:

1. Navigate to Extension/Trunk🡪Outbound Routes🡪PIN Groups and click on the “Upload” button.

2. Select the CSV file to upload. Incorrect file formats and improperly formatted CSV files will result in error messages such as the one below:

3. To ensure a successful import, please follow the format in the sample image below

• The top-left value (A1) is the PIN Group name. In this case, it is “ALPHA”.
• Row 2 contains the labels for the modifiable fields: pin and pin_name. These values should not be changed and will cause an upload error otherwise.
• Rows 3+ contain the user-defined values with Column A holding the PINs and Column B holding the PIN names. PIN values must consist of at least four digits.
• Once the file is successfully uploaded, the entry will be added to the list of PIN Groups.

Inbound Routes

Inbound routes can be configured via Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Inbound Routes.

• Click on to add a new inbound route.
• Click on “Blacklist” to configure the blacklist for all inbound routes.
• Click on to edit the inbound route.
• Click on to delete the inbound route.

Inbound Route Configuration

Inbound Route: Prepend Example

UCM630X allows users to prepend digits to an inbound DID pattern, with strip taking precedence over prepend. With the ability to prepend digits in the inbound route DID pattern, the user no longer needs to create multiple routes for the same trunk to route calls to different extensions. The following example demonstrates the process:

1. If Trunk provides a DID pattern of 18005251163.
2. If Strip is set to 8, UCM630X will strip the first 8 digits.
3. If Prepend is set to 2, UCM630X will then prepend a 2 to the stripped number, now the number becomes 2163.
4. UCM630X will now forward the incoming call to extension 2163.

Inbound Route: Multiple Mode

In the UCM630X, the user can configure an inbound route to enable multiple mode to switch between different destinations. The inbound multiple mode can be enabled under Inbound Route settings.

When Multiple Mode is enabled for the inbound route, the user can configure a “Default Destination” and a “Mode 1” destination for all routes. By default, the call coming into the inbound routes will be routed to the default destination.

SIP end devices that have registered on the UCM630X can dial feature code *62 to switch to inbound route “Mode 1” and dial feature code *61 to switch back to “Default Destination”. Switching between different mode can be easily done without Web GUI login.

For example, the customer service hotline destination has to be set to a different IVR after 7 PM. The user can dial *62 to switch to “Mode 1” with that IVR set as the destination before off work.

To customize feature codes for “Default Mode” and “Mode 1”, click on under the “Inbound Routes” page, check the “Enable Inbound Multiple Mode” option, and change “Inbound Default Mode” and “Inbound Mode 1” values (By default, *61 and *62 respectively).

Inbound Route: Route-Level Mode

In the UCM630X, users can enable Route-Level Inbound Mode to switch between different destinations for each inbound route. The inbound Route-Level mode can be enabled under Inbound Route settings.

The global inbound mode must be enabled before configuring Route-Level Inbound Mode. Additionally, Mode 1 must be configured as well.

When Route-Level Inbound Mode is enabled, the user can configure a “Default Destination” and a “Mode 1” destination for each specific route. By default, the call coming into this specific inbound route will be routed to the default destination.

Users can toggle the route’s inbound mode by dialing “Global Inbound Mode feature code + Inbound Mode Suffix” and the current inbound route can be monitored by subscribing a BLF to the Inbound Mode Suffix.

For example, the Inbound Default Mode feature code is set to *61 and the Inbound Mode suffix for route 1 is set to 1010. To switch the mode of route 1 to Default Mode, users can dial *611010.

Note: Toggling the global inbound mode will not affect routes that have Route-level Inbound Mode enabled. If all routes have the option enabled, toggling the global inbound mode via BLF will trigger a voice prompt indicating that none of the routes will be affected by the global inbound mode change.

Inbound Route: Inbound Mode BLF Monitoring

Users can assign MPKs and VPKs to monitor and toggle the current global inbound mode of the UCM.

To do this, please refer to the following steps:

1. Access the UCM web GUI and navigate to Extension/Trunk🡪Inbound Routes.
2. Click on the button and enable Inbound Multiple Mode.
3. Edit the subscribe number field to the desired BLF value.

4. Configure the BLF value on a phone’s MPK/VPK. As an example, a GXP2140 with the BLF configured will show the Inbound Mode status on its screen once configured. The 777 BLF is lit green, indicating that the current inbound mode is “Default Mode”.

5. Pressing the key will toggle the inbound mode to “Mode 1”, and the button’s color will change to red.

Inbound Route: Import/Export Inbound Route

Users can now import and export inbound routes to quickly set up inbound routing on a UCM or to back up an existing configuration. An exported inbound route configuration can be directly imported without needing any manual modifications.

The imported file should be in CSV format and using UTF-8 encoding, the imported file should contain below columns, and each column should be separated by a comma (It is recommended to use Notepad++ for the imported file creation):

• Disable This Route: Yes/No.
• Pattern: Always prefixed with _
• CallerID Pattern: Always prefixed with _
• Prepend Trunk Name: Yes/No.
• Prepend User Defined Name Enable: Yes/No.
• Prepend User Defined Name: A string.
• Alert-info: None, Ring 1, Ring 2… User should enter an Alert-info string following the values we have in the Inbound route Alert-Info list.
• Allowed to seamless transfer: [Extension_number]
• Inbound Multiple Mode: Yes/No.
• Default Destination: By DID, Extension, Voicemail… Users should enter a Default Destination string following the values we have in the Inbound route Default Destination list.
• Destination: An Extension number, Ring Group Extension…
• Default Time Condition.
• Mode 1: By DID, Extension, Voicemail… Users should enter a Default Destination string following the values we have in the mode 1 Default Destination list.
• Mode 1 Destination: An Extension number, Ring Group Extension…
• Mode 1 Time Condition.

Blacklist Configurations

In the UCM630X, Blacklist is supported for all inbound routes. Users could enable the Blacklist feature and manage the Blacklist by clicking on “Blacklist”.

• Select the checkbox for “Blacklist Enable” to turn on the Blacklist feature for all inbound routes. Blacklist is disabled by default.
• Enter a number in the “Add Blacklist Number” field and then click ”Add” to add to the list. Anonymous can also be added as a Blacklist Number by typing “Anonymous” in Add Blacklist Number field.
• To remove a number from the Blacklist, select the number in the “Blacklist list” and click on or click on the” Clear” button to remove all the numbers on the blacklist.
• Users can also export the inbound route blacklist by pressing the button.

• To add blacklisted numbers in batch, click on “Import” to upload the blacklist file in CSV format. The supported CSV format is as below.

FAX SERVER

The UCM6300 series supports T.30/T.38 Fax and Fax Pass-through. It can convert the received Fax to PDF format and send it to the configured Email address. Fax/T.38 settings can be accessed via Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪FAX/T.38. The list of received Fax files will be displayed on the same web page for users to view, retrieve and delete.

Configure Fax/T.38

• Click on “Create New Fax Extension”. In the popped-up window, fill the extension, name, and Email address to send the received Fax to.
• Click on “Fax Settings” to configure the Fax parameters.
• Click on to edit the Fax extension.
• Click on to delete the Fax extension.

Enable Error Correction Mode	Configure to enable Error Correction Mode (ECM) for the Fax. The default setting is “Yes”.
Maximum Transfer Rate	Configure the maximum transfer rate during the Fax rate negotiation. The possible values are 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12000, and 14400. The default setting is 14400.
Minimum Transfer Rate	Configure the minimum transfer rate during the Fax rate negotiation. The possible values are 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12000, and 14000. The default setting is 2400.
Max Concurrent Sending Fax	Configure the concurrent fax that can be sent by UCM6300. Two modes “Only” and “More” are supported. Only Under this mode, the UCM6300 allows only a single user to send a fax at a time. More Under this mode, the UCM6300 supports multiple concurrent faxes sending by the users. By default, this option is set to “only”.
Fax Queue Length	Configure the maximum length of Fax Queue from 6 to 10. The default setting is 6.
User Information in Fax Header	If enabled, this will give users the option to send a special header in SIP fax messages.
Fax Header Information	Adds fax header into the fax file.
Default Email Address	Configure the Email address to send the received Fax to if the user’s Email address cannot be found. Note: The extension’s Email address or the Fax’s default Email address needs to be configured to receive Fax from Email. If neither of them is configured, Fax will not be received from email.
Template Variables	Fill in the “Subject:” and “Message:” content, to be used in the Email when sending the Fax to the users. The template variables are: ${CALLERIDNUM} : Caller ID Number ${CALLERIDNAME} : Caller ID Name ${RECEIVEEXTEN} : The extension to receive the Fax ${FAXPAGES} : Number of pages in the Fax ${VM_DATE} : The date and time when the Fax is received. (Format: MM/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss )
Send PDF Files Only	If enabled, fax emails will no longer attach TIFF files. Only PDF files will be attached.
Enable Fax Resend	Enables the fax resend option which allows the UCM to keep attempting to send faxes up to a specified amount of times. Additionally, if fax still fails to send, a Resend button will appear in the File Send Progress list in Integrations🡪Fax Sending to allow manual resending.
Max Resend Attempts	Configures the number of the maximum attempts to resend the fax. The default value is set to 5.
Fax Resend Frequency	Configures the Fax Resend Frequency. The default value is set to 50.

Receiving Fax

Example Configuration to Receive Fax from PSTN Line

The following instructions describe how to use the UCM6300 to receive fax from the PSTN line on the Fax machine connected to the UCM6300 FXS port.

1. Connect Fax machine to the UCM6300 FXS port.
2. Connect PSTN line to the UCM6300 FXO port.
3. Go to Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk page.
4. Create or edit the analog trunk for Fax as below.

Fax Detection: Make sure the “Fax Detection” option is set to “NO”.

5. Go to UCM6300 Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Extensions page.
6. Create or edit the extension for FXS port.

• Analog Station: Select FXS port to be assigned to the extension. By default, it is set to “None”.
• Once selected, analog related settings for this extension will show up in “Analog Settings” section.

7. Go to Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Inbound Routes page.
8. Create an inbound route to use the Fax analog trunk. Select the created extension for Fax machine in step 4 as the default destination.

Now the Fax configuration is done. When there is an incoming Fax calling to the PSTN number for the FXO port, it will send the Fax to the Fax machine.

Example Configuration for Fax-To-Email

The following instructions describe a sample configuration on how to use Fax-to-Email feature on the UCM6300.

1. Connect PSTN line to the UCM6300 FXO port.
2. Go to UCM6300 Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪Fax/T.38 page. Create a new Fax extension.

3. Go to UCM6300 Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Analog Trunks page. Create a new analog trunk. Please make sure “Fax Detection” is set to “No”.
4. Go to UCM6300 Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Inbound Routes page. Create a new inbound route and set the default destination to the Fax extension.

5. Once successfully configured, the incoming Fax from external Fax machine to the PSTN line number will be converted to PDF+Tiff file and sent to the extension 7200 and email address fax@domain.local as attachment.

In order for the file to be sent to the email address configured on the external extension, please make sure that the email settings are well configured. Please refer to [Email Settings] section.

FAX Sending

Besides the support of Fax machines, The UCM6300 supports also sending Fax via Web GUI access. This feature can be found on Web GUI🡪Integrations🡪Fax Sending page. To send fax, pre-setup for analog trunk and outbound route is required. Please refer to [ANALOG TRUNKS], [VOIP TRUNKS] and [Outbound Routes] sections for configuring analog trunk and outbound route.

After making sure analog trunk or VoIP Trunk is setup properly and UCM6300 can reach out to PSTN numbers via the trunk, on Fax Sending page, enter the fax number and upload the file to be faxed. Then click on “Send” to start. The progress of sending fax will be displayed in Web GUI. Users can also view the sending history is in the same web page.

After that you can see the ongoing sending operation on the progress bar.

MULTIMEDIA MEETING

The UCM630X supports multimedia meeting room allowing multiple rooms used at the same time.

The multimedia meeting room configurations can be accessed under Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪 Multimedia Meeting. In this page, users could create, edit, view, invite, manage the participants, and delete multimedia meeting rooms. The multimedia meeting room status and meeting call recordings (if recording is enabled) will be displayed in this web page as well.

For video meeting, which is based on WebRTC, participants can join the meeting from PC without installing extra plug-in or software.

The UCM admin can create multiple multimedia meeting rooms for users to dial in.

UCM630x Series	Number of public meeting rooms	Number of meeting room members
UCM6301	4	75
UCM6302	8	150
UCM6304	15	200
UCM6308	25	300

Meeting room specifications affect user participation to a certain extent. UCM supports forecasting of meeting resources. There will be corresponding judgments and adjustments in the following scenarios:

1. When meeting resources are used up, scheduled meeting members cannot join the meeting in advance.
2. When a point-to-point call is transferred to a conference, the conference resources are used up.
3. When meeting resources are used up, do not join a group IM chat when you initiate a meeting.
4. When meeting resources are used up, do not join an instant meeting.
5. Close other instant meetings or scheduled meetings that have timed out to ensure that invited members can join the scheduled meeting.
6. In an ongoing meeting, if the number of invited members exceeds the upper limit, members cannot be invited to join the meeting.
7. Enable flow control for videos and presentations in the conference room.

Notes:

The multimedia meeting room supports up to 4 video calls and one video presentation.

– The administrator can set the number of videos to 9 parties. The increase in the number of videos will take up more system resources and affect the overall performance of the UCM system. Please set it according to your needs.

– During a meeting, when the system detects that another scheduled meeting is about to be held, it will remind the meeting members that the subsequent meeting room has been reserved, please end the meeting in advance.

– The use of video in the meeting will take up system resources and may cause performance problems when used.

– The maximum meeting duration is 12 hours. If it exceeds 12 hours, the system will remind the current meeting and the host can continue to extend the meeting.

Multimedia Room Configurations

• Click on “Add” to add a new meeting room.
• Click on to edit the meeting room.
• Click on to delete the meeting room.

Meeting Settings contains the following options:

Log in to the UCM Web GUI and open the Call Features 🡪 Multimedia Meeting page to manage the conference room. Users can create, edit, view, invite, manage meeting members, and delete meeting rooms. The conference room status and conference call recording (if recording function is enabled) will be displayed on the page. The meeting rooms in the list include public meeting rooms and random meeting rooms. For temporary meeting room administrators, only the “batch kicking people” function is supported. The temporary meeting room has no meeting password and host code. The member who initiates the group meeting is the host, and ordinary members have the right to invite.

Meetings Settings

To edit the general settings of the meetings rooms created in the UCM, the user can click on “Meetings Settings” button under the Room tab.

Multimedia Meeting Call Operations

Join a Meeting Call

Users could dial the meeting room extension to join the meeting. If password is required, enter the password to join the meeting as a normal user, or enter the admin password to join the meeting as administrator.

Invite Other Parties to Join Meeting

When using the UCM630X meeting room., there are two ways to invite other parties to join the meeting.

• Invite from Web GUI.

For each meeting room in UCM630X Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪 Multimedia Meeting, there is an icon for option “Invite a participant”. Click on it and enter the number of the party you would like to invite. Then click on “Add”. A call will be sent to this number to join it into the conference. 

• Invite by dialing 0 or 1 during conference call.

A meeting participant can invite other parties to the meeting by dialing from the phone during the meeting call. Please make sure option “Enable User Invite” is turned on for the meeting room first. Enter 0 or 1 during the meeting call. Follow the voice prompt to input the number of the party you would like to invite. A call will be sent to this number to join it into the meeting.

0: If 0 is entered to invite other party, once the invited party picks up the invitation call, a permission will be asked to “accept” or “reject” the invitation before joining the conference.

1: If 1 is entered to invite other party, no permission will be required from the invited party.

During The Meeting

During the meeting call, users can manage the conference from Web GUI or IVR.

• Manage the meeting call from Web GUI.

Log in UCM630X Web GUI during the meeting call, the participants in each meeting room will be listed.

1. Click on to kick a participant from the meeting.
2. Click on to mute the participant.
3. Click on to lock this meeting room so that other users cannot join it anymore.
4. Click on to invite other users into the meeting room.
5. Click on to Invite meeting rooms or invite contact groups.

• Manage the meeting call from IVR.

Please see options listed in the table below.

Meeting Administrator IVR Menu
1	Mute/unmute yourself.
2	Lock/unlock the conference room.
3	Kick the last joined user from the conference.
4	Decrease the volume of the conference call.
5	Decrease your volume.
6	Increase the volume of the conference call.
7	Increase your volume.
8	More options. 1: List all users currently in the conference call. 2: Kick all non-Administrator participants from the conference call. 3: Mute/Unmute all non-Administrator participants from the conference call. 4: Record the conference call. 8: Exit the caller menu and return to the conference.
Meeting User IVR Menu
1	Mute/unmute yourself.
4	Decrease the volume of the conference call.
5	Decrease your volume.
6	Increase the volume of the conference call.
7	Increase your volume.
8	Exit the caller menu and return to the conference.

Google Service Settings Support

UCM630X now supports Google OAuth 2.0 authentication. This feature is used for supporting UCM630X conference scheduling system. Once OAuth 2.0 is enabled, UCM630X conference system can access Google calendar to schedule or update conference.

Google Service Settings can be found under Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪 Multimedia Meeting 🡪Google Service Settings🡪Google Service Settings.

If you already have OAuth2.0 project set up on Google Developers web page, please use your existing login credential for “OAuth2.0 Client ID” and “OAuth2.0 Client Secret” in the above figure for the UCM630X to access Google Service.

If you do not have OAuth2.0 project set up yet, please following the steps below to create new project and obtain credentials:

1. Go to Google Developers page https://console.developers.google.com/start Create a New Project in Google Developers page.

2. Enable Calendar API from API Library.
3. Click “Credentials” on the left drop down menu to create new OAuth2.0 login credentials.

4. Use the newly created login credential to fill in “OAuth2.0 Client ID” and “OAuth2.0 Client Secret”.
5. Click “Get Authentication Code” to obtain authentication code from Google Service.

6. Now UCM630X is connected with Google Service.

You can also configure the Status update, which automatically refresh your Google Calendar with the configured time (m). Note: Zero means disable.

Meeting Schedule

Log in to the UCM Web GUI, open the Call Features 🡪 Mutimedia Meeting 🡪 Meeting Schedule page, and you can manage the reservation management of the meeting room. Users can create, edit, view, and delete conference room reservation records. The following is a set meeting room reservation, which shows the ongoing and pending reservations. Once the conference room is reserved, all users will be removed from the conference room at the start time, and extensions will no longer be allowed to enter the conference room. At the scheduled meeting time, UCM will send invitations to the extensions that have been selected to participate in the meeting. At the same time, it supports users to enter the meeting 10 minutes in advance. If the current meeting is occupied, enter the waiting room and wait (members joining the meeting in advance occupy global member resources, but it will be released after the scheduled meeting starts); otherwise, you can join the meeting directly and the meeting will be held in advance. After the meeting ends, the reservation record is transferred to the historical meeting list. History meeting displays the information of the ended and expired meetings.

• Click the button “Schedule Meeting” to edit the meeting room reservation.

Once the Meeting Schedule is configured, scheduled meeting will be displayed as below figure.

• Click the button to view the meeting details in the Meeting room. The meeting details of Meeting History include actual participant information.

• Click on to edit the Meeting Schedule.
• Click on to delete the Meeting Schedule.

At the scheduled meeting time, UCM630X will send INVITE to the extensions that have been selected for conference.

Once the meeting starts, it will be displayed under Pending Meeting with an “Ongoing” status, as displayed below:

Once the conference is finished, the conference will be displayed under Historical meeting as below:

• Click the button to download the Meeting Report of the meeting.
• Click the button to reschedule the Meeting.

In addition, once the meeting ends, the system will send a meeting report email to the host including PDF file where he/she can view the meeting, participant information, device type and trend graph of participant levels.

You can also choose to display the meetings that took place in a specific timeframe. Please see the screenshot below:

Meeting Recordings

The UCM630X allows users to record the audio of the meeting call and retrieve the recording from Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪 Multimedia Meeting🡪 Meeting Recordings.

To record the Meeting call, when the meeting room is in idle, enable “Auto Record” from the meeting room configuration dialog. Save the setting and apply the change. When the meeting call starts, the call will be automatically recorded in .wav format.

The recording files will be listed as below once available. Users could click on to download the recording or click on to delete the recording. Users could also delete all recording files by clicking on “Delete All Recording Files” or delete multiple recording files at once by clicking on “Delete” after selecting the recording files.

Meeting Video Recordings

The UCM630X allows users to record the audio and video of the meeting call and retrieve the recording from Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪 Multimedia Meeting🡪 Meeting Recordings.

To record the Meeting call, when the meeting room is in idle, enable “Auto Record” from the meeting room configuration dialog. Save the setting and apply the change. When the meeting call starts, the call will be automatically recorded in .mkv format.

The recording files will be listed as below once available. Users could click on to download the recording or click on to delete the recording. Users could also delete all recording files by clicking on “Delete All Recording Files” or delete multiple recording files at once by clicking on “Delete” after selecting the recording files.

Call Statistics

Meeting reports will now be generated after every conference. These reports can be exported to a .CSV file for offline viewing. The conference report page can be accessed by clicking on the Call Statistics button on the main Conference page.

ONSITE MEETING

For workplaces that require employees to return to physical offices for work, Grandstream UCM offers the Onsite Meetings feature, a new way to stay organized and keep up-to-date with in-person meetings. This feature allows administrators to create and manage onsite meeting rooms, specify meeting room locations, schedule meetings, and add conferencing equipment. The new feature can be found under the Device Management🡪Onsite Meeting page. The first page that appears is the Scheduled Meetings page and tab page, which provide an overview of all created meeting rooms. It provides information about the rooms’ meeting schedules for the day, their locations, their member capacity, and their equipment.

The Pending Meeting tab and Meeting History tab show detailed information about upcoming meetings and previous meetings respectively. From the Pending Meeting tab, users can delete upcoming meetings and extend the duration of ongoing meetings. The Meeting History tab will display the last 6 months of onsite meetings.

When a meeting is scheduled the invitees will receive an invitation via email which contains all the information regarding the onsite meeting. The email will be attached with an .ics file which can be imported to a calendar to mark your calendar of the onsite meeting, please see the screenshot below.

IVR

Configure IVR

IVR configurations can be accessed under the UCM630X Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪IVR. Users could create, edit, view, and delete an IVR.

• Click on “Add” to add a new IVR.
• Click on to edit the IVR configuration.
• Click on to delete the IVR.

Basic Settings
Name	Configure the name of the IVR. Letters, digits, _ and – are allowed.
Extension	Enter the extension number for users to access the IVR.
Dial Trunk	If enabled, all callers to the IVR can use trunk. The permission must be configured for the users to use the trunk first. The default setting is “No”.
Auto Record	If enabled, calls to this IVR will automatically be recorded.
Permission	Assign permission level for outbound calls if “Dial Trunk” is enabled. The available permissions are “Internal”, “Local”, “National” and “International” from the lowest level to the highest level. The default setting is “Internal”. If the user tries to dial outbound calls after dialing into the IVR, the UCM630X will compared the IVR’s permission level with the outbound route’s privilege level. If the IVR’s permission level is higher than (or equal to) the outbound route’s privilege level, the call will be allowed to go through.
Dial Other Extensions	This controls the destination that can be reached by the external caller via the inbound route. The available destinations are: Extension Conference Call Queue Ring Group Paging/Intercom Groups Voicemail Groups Dial by Name All
IVR Black/Whitelist	If enabled only numbers inside of the Whitelist or outside of the Blacklist can be called from IVR.
Internal Black/Whitelist	Contain numbers, either of Blacklist or Whitelist.
External Black/Whitelist	This feature can be used only when Dial Trunk is enabled, it contains external numbers allowed or denied calling from the IVR, the allowed format is the following: Number1, number2, number3…
Replace Display Name	If enabled, the UCM will replace the caller display name with IVR name.
Return to IVR Menu	If enabled and if a call to an extension fails, the caller will be redirected to the IVR menu.
Alert Info	When present in an INVITE request, the alert-Info header field specifies and alternative ring tone to the UAS.
Prompt	Select an audio file to play as the welcome prompt for the IVR. Click on “Prompt” to add additional audio file under Web GUI🡪PBX Settings🡪Voice Prompt🡪Custom Prompt.
Digit Timeout	Configure the timeout between digit entries. After the user enters a digit, the user needs to enter the next digit within the timeout. If no digit is detected within the timeout, the UCM630X will consider the entries complete. The default timeout is 3s.
Response Timeout	After playing the prompts in the IVR, the UCM630X will wait for the DTMF entry within the timeout (in seconds). If no DTMF entry is detected within the timeout, a timeout prompt will be played. The default setting is 10 seconds.
Response Timeout Prompt	Select the prompt message to be played when timeout occurs.
Invalid Input Prompt	Select the prompt message to be played when an invalid extension is pressed.
Response Timeout Prompt Repeats	Configure the number of times to repeat the prompt if no DTMF input is detected. When the loop ends, it will go to the timeout destination if configured, or hang up. The default setting is 3.
Invalid Input Prompt Repeats	Configure the number of times to repeat the prompt if the DTMF input is invalid. When the loop ends, it will go to the invalid destination if configured, or hang up. The default setting is 3.
Language	Select the voice prompt language to be used for this IVR. The default setting is “Default” which is the selected voice prompt language under Web GUI🡪PBX Settings🡪Voice Prompt🡪Language Settings. The dropdown list shows all the current available voice prompt languages on the UCM630X. To add more languages in the list, please download voice prompt package by selecting “Check Prompt List” under Web GUI🡪PBX Settings🡪Voice Prompt🡪Language Settings.
Key Pressing Events
Key Press Event: Press 0 Press 1 Press 2 Press 3 Press 4 Press 5 Press 6 Press 7 Press 8 Press 9 Press *	Select the event for each key pressing for 0-9, *, Timeout and Invalid. The event options are: Extension Voicemail Multimedia Meeting Voicemail Group IVR Ring Group Queues Page Group Custom Prompt Hangup DISA Dial by Name External Number Callback For each key event, time condition can be configured. At the configured time condition, this IVR key event can be triggered. Office time, holiday time or specific time can be configured for time condition. Up to 5 time conditions can be added for each key. The available time conditions are ‘All’, ‘Office Time’, ‘Out of Office Time’, ‘Holiday’, ‘Out of Holiday’, ‘Out of Office Time or Holiday’, ‘Office Time and Out of Holiday’ and ‘Specific Time’. If ‘Specific Time’ is selected, a new window will prompt for admin to configure start time, end time and frequency.
Timeout	When exceeding the number of defined answer timeout, IVR will enter the configured event when timeout. If not configured, then it will Hangup.
Invalid	Configure the destination when the Invalid Repeat Loop is done.
Time Condition	Configure the time condition for each key press event, so that it goes to the corresponding destination within a specified time.

Black/Whitelist in IVR

In some scenarios, the IPPBX administrator needs to restrict the extensions that can be reached from IVR.
For example, the company CEO and directors prefer only receiving calls transferred by the secretary, some special extensions are used on IP surveillance end points which should not be reached from external calls via IVR for privacy reason. UCM has now added blacklist and whitelist in IVR settings for users to manage this.

To use this feature, log in UCM Web GUI and navigate to Call Features🡪IVR🡪Create/Edit IVR: IVR Black/Whitelist.

• If the user selects “Blacklist Enable” and adds extension in the list, the extensions in the list will not be allowed to be reached via IVR.
• If the user selects “Whitelist Enable” and adds extension in the list, only the extensions in the list can be allowed to be reached via IVR.

Create Custom Prompt

To record new IVR prompt or upload IVR prompt to be used in IVR, click on “Upload Audio File” next to the “Welcome Prompt” option and the users will be redirected to Custom Prompt page. Or users could go to Web GUI🡪PBX Settings🡪Voice Prompt🡪Custom Prompt page directly.

Once the IVR prompt file is successfully added to the UCM630X, it will be added into the prompt list options for users to select in different IVR scenarios.

Key Pressing Events

Standard Key Event

UCM supports adding time conditions for different key events, so that each key event of the IVR goes to the corresponding destination within a specified time.

Each key event support up to five time conditions, the options available are: All time, Office Time, Out of Office Time, Holiday, Out of Holiday, Out of Office Time or Holiday, Office Time and Out Of Holiday, Specific time.

Note:

If you select “Specific time”, you need to select the start time and the end time.

The frequency supports two options: By week and By Month, by default the specific time does not include the holidays.

Custom Key Event

Users can create custom IVR key press events, vastly increasing the options a business can provide to its customers and improving customer relations and accessibility.

This new feature supports the following:

• Up to 100 custom key press events
• Each key combination can contain up to 8 characters (numbers and star (*) only)
• Supports Time Conditions
• Different custom keys can have the same Destination and Time Condition

LANGUAGE SETTINGS FOR VOICE PROMPT

The UCM630X supports multiple languages in Web GUI as well as system voice prompt. Currently, there are 16 languages supported in system voice prompt: English (United States), Arabic, Chinese, Dutch, English (United Kingdom), French, German, Greek, Hebrew, Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Catalan, Swedish and Turkish.

English (United States) and Chinese voice prompts are built in with the UCM630X already. The other languages provided by Grandstream can be downloaded and installed from the UCM630X Web GUI directly. Additionally, users could customize their own voice prompts, package them and upload to the UCM630X.

Language settings for voice prompt can be accessed under Web GUI🡪PBX Settings🡪Voice Prompt🡪Language Settings.

Download and Install Voice Prompt Package

To download and install voice prompt package in different languages from UCM630X Web GUI, click on “Add Voice Prompt Package” button.

A new dialog window of voice prompt package list will be displayed. Users can see the version number (latest version available V.S. current installed version), package size and options to upgrade or download the language.

Click on to download the language to the UCM630X. The installation will be automatically started once the downloading is finished.

A new language option will be displayed after successfully installed. Users then could select it to apply in the UCM630X system voice prompt or delete it from the UCM630X.

Custom Prompt

Record New Custom Prompt

In the UCM630X Web GUI🡪PBX Settings🡪Voice Prompt🡪Custom Prompt page, click on “Record” and follow the steps below to record new IVR prompt.

1. Specify the IVR file name.
2. Select the format (GSM or WAV) for the IVR prompt file to be recorded.
3. Select the extension to receive the call from the UCM630X to record the IVR prompt.
4. Click the “Record” button. A request will be sent to the UCM630X. The UCM630X will then call the extension for recording the IVR prompt from the phone.
5. Pick up the call from the extension and start the recording following the voice prompt.
6. The recorded file will be listed in the IVR Prompt web page. Users could select to re-record, play, or delete the recording.

Upload Custom Prompt

If the user has a pre-recorded IVR prompt file, click on “Upload” in Web GUI🡪PBX Settings🡪Voice Prompt🡪Custom Prompt page to upload the file to the UCM630X. The following are required for the IVR prompt file to be successfully uploaded and used by the UCM630X:

• PCM encoded.
• 16 bits.
• 8000Hz mono.
• In .mp3 or .wav format; or raw/ulaw/alaw/gsm file with .ulaw or .alaw suffix.
• File size under 5M.

Click on “choose file to upload” to start uploading. Once uploaded, the file will appear in the Custom Prompt web page.

If the file uploaded is mp3, the following prompt will appear.

Tick “Keep Copy of MP3” to keep an mp3 copy of the file which can be diffused with certain GSC speakers. Diffusing the MP3 files result in a highr quality sound played by GCS speakers.

Download All Custom Prompt

On the UCM630X, the users can download all custom prompts from UCM Web GUI to local PC. To download all custom prompt, log in UCM Web GUI and navigate to PBX Settings🡪Voice Prompt🡪Custom Prompt and click on ”Download All”. The following window will pop up in order to set a name for the downloaded file.

Username Prompt Customization

There are two ways to customize/set new username prompt:

Upload Username Prompt File from Web GUI

1. First, Users should have a pre-recorded file respecting the following format:

• PCM encoded / 16 bits / 8000Hz mono.
• In .tar/.tar.gz/.tgz format
• File size under 30M.
• Filename must be set as the extension number with 18 characters max. For example, the recorded file name 1000.wav will be used for extension 1000.

2. Go under web GUI PBX Settings 🡪 Voice Prompt 🡪 Username Prompt and click on ”Upload” button.
3. Select the recorded file to upload it and press Save and Apply Settings.

• Click on to record again the username prompt.
• Click on to play recorded username prompt.
• Select username prompts and press to delete specific file or select multiple files for deletion using the button ”Delete” .

Record Username via Voicemail Menu

The second option to record username is using voicemail menu, please follow below steps:

• Dial *98 to access the voicemail
• After entering the desired extension and voicemail password, dial “0” to enter the recordings menu and then “3” to record a name.

Another option is that each user can record their own name by following below steps:

• The user dials *97 to access his/her voicemail
• After entering the voicemail password, the user can press “0” to enter the recordings menu and then “3” to record his name.

VOICEMAIL

Configure Voicemail

If the voicemail is enabled for UCM630X extensions, the configurations of the voicemail can be globally set up and managed under Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪Voicemail.

Max Greeting Time (s)	Configure the maximum number of seconds for the voicemail greeting. The default setting is 60 seconds.
Dial ‘0’ For Operator	If enabled, the caller can press 0 to exit the voicemail application and connect to the configured operator’s extension.
Operator Type	Configure the operator type; either an extension or a ring group.
Operator Extension	Select the operator extension, which will be dialed when users press 0 to exit voicemail application. The operator extension can also be used in IVR.
Max Messages Per Folder	Configure the maximum number of messages per folder in users’ voicemail. The valid range 10 to 1000. The default setting is 50.
Max Message Time	Select the maximum duration of the voicemail message. The message will not be recorded if the duration exceeds the max message time. The default setting is 15 minutes. The available options are: 1 minute 2 minutes 5 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes Unlimited
Min Effective Message Time	Configure the minimum duration (in seconds) of a voicemail message. Messages will be automatically deleted if the duration is shorter than the Min Message Time. The default setting is 3 seconds. The available options are: No minimum 1 second 2 seconds 3 seconds 4 seconds 5 seconds Note: Silence and noise duration are not counted in message time.
Announce Message Caller-ID	If enabled, the caller ID of the user who has left the message will be announced at the beginning of the voicemail message. The default setting is “No”.
Announce Message Duration	If enabled, the message duration will be announced at the beginning of the voicemail message. The default setting is “No”.
Play Envelope	If enabled, a brief introduction (received time, received from, and etc.) of each message will be played when accessed from the voicemail application. The default setting is “Yes”.
Play Most Recent First	If enabled, it will play the most recent message first.
Allow User Review	If enabled, users can review the message following the IVR before sending.
Voicemail Remote Access	If enabled, external callers routed by DID and reaching VM will be prompted by the UCM with 2 options: Press 1 to leave a message. To leave a message for the extension reached by DID. Press 2 to access voicemail management system. This will allow caller to access any extension VM after entering extension number and its VM password. Note: This option applies to inbound call routed by DID only. The default setting is “Disabled”.
Forward Voicemail to Peered UCMs	Enables the forwarding of voicemail to remote extensions on peered SIP trunks. The default setting is “Disabled”.
Voicemail Password	Configures the default voicemail password that will be used when an extension is reset.
Format	Warning: WAV files take up significantly more storage space than GSM files.

Access Voicemail

If the voicemail is enabled for UCM630X extensions, the users can dial the voicemail access number (by default *97) to access their extension’s voicemail. The users will be prompted to enter the voicemail password and then can enter digits from the phone keypad to navigate in the IVR menu for different options.

Otherwise the user can dial the voicemail access code (by default *98) followed by the extension number and password in order to access to that specific extension’s voicemail.

Leaving Voicemail

If an extension has voicemail enabled under basic settings “Extension/Trunk 🡪 Extensions 🡪 Basic Settings” and after a ring timeout or user not available, the caller will be automatically redirected to the voicemail in order to leave a message on which case they can press # in order to submit the message.

In case if the caller is calling from an internal extension, they will be directly forwarded to the extension’s voicemail box. But if the caller is calling from outside the system and the incoming call is routed by DID to the destination extension, then the caller will be prompted with the choice to either press1 to access voicemail management or press 2 to leave a message for the called extension. This feature could be useful for remote voicemail administration.

Voicemail Email Settings

The UCM630X can be configured to send the voicemail as attachment to Email. Click on “Voicemail Email Settings” button to configure the Email attributes and content.

Send Voicemail to Email	If enabled, voicemail will be sent to the user’s email address. Note: SMTP server must be configured to use this option.
Keep Voicemail after Emailing	Enable this option if you want to keep recording files after the Email is sent. The default setting is Enable.
Email Template	Fill in the “Subject:” and “Message:” content, to be used in the Email when sending to the user. The template variables are: \t: TAB ${VM_NAME}: Recipient’s first name and last name ${VM_DUR}: The duration of the voicemail message ${VM_MAILBOX}: The recipient’s extension ${VM_CALLERID}: The caller ID of the person who has left the message ${VM_MSGNUM}: The number of messages in the mailbox ${VM_DATE}: The date and time when the message is left. (Format: MM/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss)

Click on “Email Template” button to view the default template as an example.

Configure Voicemail Group

The UCM630X supports voicemail group and all the extensions added in the group will receive the voicemail to the group extension. The voicemail group can be configured under Web GUI 🡪 Call Features 🡪 Voicemail 🡪 Voicemail Group. Click on “Add” to configure the group.

RING GROUP

The UCM630X supports ring group feature with different ring strategies applied to the ring group members. This section describes the ring group configuration on the UCM630X.

Configure Ring Group

Ring group settings can be accessed via Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪Ring Group.

• Click on to add ring group.
• Click on to edit the ring group. The following table shows the ring group configuration parameters.
• Click on to delete the ring group.

Remote Extension in Ring Group

Remote extensions from the peer trunk of a remote UCM630X can be included in the ring group with local extension. An example of Ring Group with peer extensions is presented in the following:

1. Creating SIP Peer Trunk between both UCM630X _A and UCM630X _B. SIP Trunk can be found under Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪VoIP Trunks. Also, please configure their Inbound/Outbound routes accordingly.
2. Click edit button in the menu , and check if Sync LDAP Enable is selected, this option will allow UCM630X_A update remote LDAP server automatically from peer UCM630X _B. In addition, Sync LDAP Password must match for UCM630X _A and UCM630X _B to sync LDAP contact automatically. Port number can be anything between 0~65535, and use the outbound rule created in step 1 for the LDAP Outbound Rule option.

3. In case if LDAP server does not sync automatically, user can manually sync LDAP server. Under VoIP Trunks page, click sync button shown in the following figure to manually sync LDAP contacts from peer UCM630X.

4. Under Ring Groups setting page, click “Add”. Ring Groups can be found under Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪Ring Groups.
5. If LDAP server is synced correctly, Available LDAP Numbers box will display available remote extensions that can be included in the current ring group. Please also make sure the extensions in the peer UCM630X can be included into that UCM630X’s LDAP contact.

RESTRICT CALLS

Restrict calls is a feature that can be used to restrict calls between internal extensions besides those in the Allowed List.

This section describes the configuration of this feature in the Call Features->Restrict Calls page.

Configure Restrict Calls

• Click on “Add” to add a rule for restrict calls.
• Click on to edit the rule of restrict calls.
• Click on to delete the rule of restrict calls.

Name	Configure Restrict call’s name
Restrict Calls between extensions	When enabled, members of the group cannot dial other extension, only the numbers in the Allowed List. By default it’s enabled.
Members	Configure the members that will not be able to call any extensions besides those in the Allowed List.
Allowed list	Select the extensions that the Members list can be able to call.

PAGING AND INTERCOM GROUP

Paging and Intercom Group can be used to make an announcement over the speaker on a group of phones. Targeted phones will answer immediately using speaker. The UCM630X paging and intercom can be used via feature code to a single extension or a paging/intercom group. This section describes the configuration of paging/intercom group under Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪Paging/Intercom.

Paging/Intercom Groups

2-way Intercom

Name	Configure paging/intercom group name.
Type	Select “2-way Intercom”.
Extension	Configure the paging/intercom group extension.
Auto Record	Enable this option to record in WAV format.
Replace Display Name	If enabled, the UCM will replace the caller display name with Paging/Intercom name.
Maximum Call Duration	Specify the maximum call duration in seconds. The default value 0 means no limit.
Custom Prompt	This option is to set a custom prompt for a paging/intercom group to announce to caller. Click on ‘Prompt’, it will direct the users to upload the customized voice prompts. Note: Users can also refer to the page PBX Settings🡪Voice Prompt🡪Custom Prompt, where they could record new prompt or upload prompt files.
Members	Select available users from the left side to the paging/intercom group member list on the right.
Paging/Intercom Whitelist	Select which extensions are allowed to use the paging/intercom feature for this paging group.

1-way Paging

Name	Configure paging/intercom group name.
Type	Select “1-way Paging”.
Extension	Configure the paging/intercom group extension.
Video Broadcast	If checked, video paging will be supported. If the caller sends a video page, the paging group members will be able to receive and view the video.
Auto Record	Enable this option to record in WAV format.
Delayed Paging	Allows the announcement to be played after the configured delay paging. If there are many messages, they will be played in sequence.
LaggedTime(seconds)	Set the delay paging duration, the default is 5 seconds.
Replace Display Name	If enabled, the UCM will replace the caller display name with Paging/Intercom name.
Maximum Call Duration	Specify the maximum call duration in seconds. The default value 0 means no limit.
Custom Prompt	This option is to set a custom prompt for a paging/intercom group to announce to caller. Click on ‘Prompt’, it will direct the users to upload the customized voice prompts.Note: Users can also refer to the page PBX Settings🡪Voice Prompt🡪Custom Prompt, where they could record new prompt or upload prompt files.
Members	Select available users from the left side to the paging/intercom group member list on the right.
Paging/Intercom Whitelist	Select which extensions are allowed to use the paging/intercom feature for this paging group.

In case the user wants to broadcast a video, these requirements should be respected.

• H.264 video encoding
• .mkv or .tar/.tgz/tar.gz format  
• MKV files must be 30 MB file or less
• Compressed files (.tar/.tgz/tar.gz) must be 50 MB or less.
• File name can only contain alphanumeric characters, hyphens (-) and period (.)

If Auto Record is enabled, recorded video pages will be saved in MKV file format.Saved recordings can be found in the CDR🡪Recordings🡪Video Recordings page.

Multicast Paging

Multicast Community

Multicast community allows creating an extension, which when dialed, can send a preconfigured prompt as a multicast paging to a group of extensions. The user should create first a Paging/Intercom Group with Multicast Paging as the Strategy selected. Please see previous section for more information.

Scheduled Paging/Intercom

Pending Paging/Intercom

In this page, the user can create scheduled intercom/paging to be played automatically when the time scheduled arrives.

Once the paging and intercom has been created, it can be viewed on the same page.

Paging/Intercom Schedule

This section displays the schedule of the paging/intercom which have been scheduled. The user can choose to display per day, week, or per month.

OPERATOR PANEL

Operator Panel settings can be accessed via Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪Operator Panel.

The UCM630X supports the operator panel so that UCM extension can be used as admin to manage calls and activities such as extension status, call queue status, transfer, barge-in, hangup, etc. On Grandstream Wave client, it can display the extensions, ring group, voicemail, call queue, call park status under the management of the extension. This section describes how to configure the operator panel.

• Click on “Add” to create the operator panel.
• Click on to edit the operator panel.
• Click on to delete the operator panel.

CALL QUEUE

The UCM630X supports call queue by using static agents or dynamic agents. Call Queue system can accept more calls than the available agents. Incoming calls will be held until next representative is available in the system. This section describes the configuration of call queue under Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪Call Queue.

Configure Call Queue

Call queue settings can be accessed via Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪Call Queue.

UCM630X supports custom prompt feature in call queue. This custom prompt will active after the caller waits for a period of time in the Queue. Then caller could choose to leave a message/ transfer to default extension or keep waiting in the queue.

To configure this feature, please go to UCM Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪Call Queue🡪Create New Queue/Edit Queue🡪Queue Options🡪set Enable Destination to Enter Destination with Voice Prompt. Users could configure the wait time with Voice Prompt Cycle.

• Click on “Add” to add call queue.
• Click on to edit the call queue. The call queue configuration parameters are listed in the table below.
• Click on to delete the call queue.

Number of agents limitation:

To guarantee a high level of audio quality with the call queue feature, UCMs will limit the number of agents allowed to be assigned depending on the UCM model used. If the user attempts to configure the number of static agents to be more than the maximum allowed number, a warning message will appear.

The following table lists the maximum number of agents for each UCM model:

UCM Model	Maximum Number of Agents in Call Queue
UCM6301	25
UCM6302	50
UCM6304	80
UCM6308	160

Click on “Global Queue Settings” to configure Agent Login Extension Postfix and Agent Logout Extension Postfix. Once configured, users could log in the call queue as dynamic agent.

For example, if the call queue extension is 6500, Agent Login Extension Postfix is * and Agent Logout Extension Postfix is **, users could dial 6500* to login to the call queue as dynamic agent and dial 6500** to logout from the call queue. Dynamic agent does not need to be listed as static agent and can log in/log out at any time.

• Call queue feature code “Agent Pause” and “Agent Unpause” can be configured under Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪Feature Codes. The default feature code is *83 for “Agent Pause” and *84 for “Agent Unpause”.
  Note: When dialing the “Agent Pause” feature code, users can specify the reason for it. The following reasons are available: (1) Lunch, (2) Hourly Break, (3) Backoffice, (4) Email, and (5) Wrap.
  The agent can also dial the feature with the number of the reason of the pause. E.g., if the agent want to perform a pause for lunch, he/she can dial *831 directly instead of waiting for the IVR response.

• Queue recordings are shown on the Call Queue page under “Queue Recordings” Tab. Click on to download the recording file in .wav format; click on to delete the recording file. To delete multiple recording files by one click, select several recording files to be deleted and click on “Delete Selected Recording Files” or click on “Delete All Recording Files” to delete all recording files.

Call Center Settings and Enhancements

UCM supports light weight call center features including virtual queue and position announcement, allowing the callers to know their position on the call queue and giving them the option to either stay on the line waiting for their turn or activate a callback which will be initiated by the UCM one an agent is free.

To configure call center features, press on an existing call queue and go under the advanced settings tab.

Following parameters are available:

Enable Virtual Queue	Enable virtual queue to activate call center features.
Virtual Queue Period	Configure the time in (s) after which the virtual queue will take effect and the menu will be presented to the caller to choose an option. Default is 20s.
Virtual Queue Mode	Offered to caller after timeout: After the virtual queue period passes, the caller will enter the virtual call queue and be presented with a menu to choose an option, the choices are summarized below: Press * to set current number as callback number. Press 0 to set a callback number different than current caller number. Press # to keep waiting on the call queue. Triggered on user request: In this mode, the callers can activate the virtual queue by pressing 2, then they will be presented with the menu to choose an option as below: Press * to set current number as callback number. Press 0 to set a callback number different than current caller number. Press # to keep waiting on the call queue.
Virtual Queue Outbound Prefix	System will add this prefix to dialed numbers when calling back users.
Enable Virtual Queue Timeout	When this option is enabled and after a caller registers a call back request on the virtual queue. While all the agents are busy, the UCM will call an agent once he/she is idle again, this timeout is used for how long the UCM continues calling the agent and if the agent doesn’t answer the call then the callback request will timeout and expire.
Write Timeout	Configure the virtual queue callback timeout period in seconds.
Enable Virtual Queue Position Announcement	Enable the announcement of the caller’s position periodically. Note: Queue position will now be announced to the caller upon entering the queue.
Position Announcement Interval	Configure the period of time in (s) during which the UCM will announce the caller’s position in the call queue.
Enable Virtual Queue Wait Time Announcement	When enabled the UCM will announce the estimated queue wait time to callers if the estimated wait time is longer than 1 minute.
Queue Chairman	Select the extension to act as chairman of the queue (monitoring).
Virtual Queue Welcome Prompt	Click on “Upload Audio File” to upload the VQ welcome prompt.
Enable Agent Login	When enabled, statics agents can conveniently log in and out of a queue by configuring a programmable key on their phones as a shortcut. Notes: This feature is currently available only for GXP21xx phones on firmware 1.0.9.18 or greater. After enabling the feature, users need to set the option on GXP21XX phone under “Account🡪SIP Settings🡪Advanced Features🡪Special Feature” to “UCM Call Center”. A softkey labeled “UCM-CC” will appear on the bottom of the phone’s screen. When this option is enabled, dynamic agent login will be no longer supported. In case of concurrent registrations, changing agent status on one phone (login/logout) will be reflected on all phones.

Queue Auto fill enhancement:

The waiting callers are connecting with available members in a parallel fashion until there are no more available members or no more waiting callers.

For example, in a call queue with linear method, if there are two available agents, when two callers call in the queue at the same time, UCM will assign the two callers to each of the two available agents at the same time, rather than assigning the second caller to second available agent after the first agent answers the call from the first caller.

Call Queue Statistics

Along with call center features, users can also gather detailed call queue statistics allowing them to make better changes/decision to manage better the call distribution and handling based on time, agent, and queue.

To access call queue statistics, go to Web GUI > Call Features > Call Queue and click on “Call Queue Statistics”, the following page will be displayed:

• Agent statistics: shows the number of calls and call-related information of agents;
• Queue Statistics: counts the number of calls in the queue and information such as calls, waiting, and callback;
• Agent satisfaction statistics used for user’s rating of agents;
• Queue satisfaction statistics counts the score survey statistics.

The overview page performs seat statistics, queue statistics, seat satisfaction statistics, and queue satisfaction statistics according to the business. Agent statistics record the number of calls and call-related information of agents; queue counts the number of calls in the queue and information such as calls, waiting, and callback; agent satisfaction statistics are survey statistics based on user ratings of agents; queue satisfaction statistics are user-queue The score survey statistics.

By selecting a time interval, administrators can get detailed statistics for agent(s) such as total calls, answered calls etc, as well as for the queue(s) such as ABANDONED CALLS also a detailed information for the queue’s call log by clicking on Options🡪Information button and the below window will pop up:

User can download statistics on CSV format by clicking on the “Download”, also the statistics can be cleared using “Reset Statistics” button.

The statistics can be automatically sent to a specific email address on a preconfigured Period, this can be done by clicking on “Automatic Download”, and user will be directed to below page where he can configure the download period (Day/Week/Month) and the Email where the statistics will be sent (Email settings should be configured correctly):

Significantly more information is now available UCM’s queue statistics page. In addition to the information presented in previous firmware, users can now view a call log that displays calls to all agents and queues, a dynamic agent login/logout record, and a pause log. Statistics reports for these new pages can be obtained by pressing the Download button in the top left corner of the Call Queue Statistics page. The reports are in .CSV format and will be packaged into a single tar.gz file upon download.

Agent Details is a call log that shows every call to each individual agent from all queues. The following information is available:

• Time – the date and time the call was received.
• Agent – the agent that was rung for the call.
• Queue – the queue that the call went to.
• Caller ID Number – the CID of the caller
• Abandoned – indicates whether the call was picked up or not by that specific agent. If the call rang several agents simultaneously, and this specific agent did not pick up the call, the call will be considered abandoned even if a different agent in the same queue picked it up.
• Wait Time – the amount of time that the call was waiting in queue after dialing in.
• Talk Time – the duration of the call after it was picked up by agent.

Login Record is a report that shows the timestamps of dynamic agent logins and logouts and calculates the amount of time the dynamic agents were logged in. Dynamic agents are extensions that log in and out either via agent login/logout codes (configured in Global Queue Settings page) or by using the GXP21xx call queue softkey. A new record will be created only when an agent logs out. The following information is available:

• Agent – the extension that logged in and out.
• Queue – the queue that the extension logged in and out of.
• Login Time – the time that the extension logged into the queue.
• Logout Time – the time that the extension logged out of the queue.
• Login Duration – the total length of time that the extension was logged in.

Pause Log is a report that shows the times of agent pauses and unpauses and calculates the amount of time that agents are paused. If an agent is part of several queues, an entry will be created for each queue. An entry will only be created after an agent unpauses. The following information is available:

• Agent: The extension that paused/unpaused.
• Name: The name of the agents that paused/unpaused.
• Queue: The queue that the agent is in.
• Pause Time: The time when the agent paused.
• Resume Time: The time when the agent unpaused.
• Pause Duration: The total length of time the agent was paused for.
• Pause Reason: The reason of the pause (e.g., lunch, coffee break, etc…)

Switchboard

Switchboard is a Web GUI tool for call queue monitoring and management, admin can access to it from the menu Call Features🡪Call Queue then press “Switchboard”.

Following page will be displayed:

Page above summarizes the available queues statistics and if one of the queues is clicked the user will be directed to page below:

The table below gives a brief description for the main menus:

Waiting	This menu shows the current waiting calls along with the caller id and the option to hang-up call by pressing on the button.
Proceeding	Shows the current established calls along with the caller id and the callee (agent) as well as the option to hang-up, transfer, add conference or barge-in the call.
Agents	Displays the list of agents in the queue and the extension status (idle, ringing, in use or unavailable) along with some basic call statistics and agent’s mode (static or dynamic). Note: the dashboard will show the number of calls (answered and abandoned) of each agent. For dynamic agents, it will count the number of calls starting from the last login time.

There are three different privilege levels for Call Queue management from the switchboard: Super Admin, Queue Chairman, and Queue Agent.

• Super Admin – Default admin of the UCM. Call queue privileges include being able to view and edit all queue agents, monitor, and execute actions for incoming and ongoing calls for each extension in Switchboard, and generate Call Queue reports to track performance.
• Queue Chairman – User appointed by Super Admin to monitor and manage an assigned queue extension via Switchboard. The Queue Chairman can log into the UCM user portal with his extension number and assigned user password. To access the Switchboard, click on “Other Features” in the side menu and click on “Call Queue”. In the image below, User 1001 is the Queue Chairman appointed to manage Queue Extension 6500 and can see all the agents of the queue in the Switchboard and their related information (Extension Status, Agent, Name, Answered, Abandoned, Login/Logout Time, Pause/Resume Time, Talk Time, Agent Status, Pause Reason, and Options). The Chairman is also able to log out dynamic agents from call queues.

• Queue Agent – User appointed by Super Admin to be a member of a queue extension. A queue agent can log into the UCM user portal with his extension number and assigned user password. To access the Switchboard, click on “Other Features” in the side menu and click on “Call Queue”. However, a queue agent can view and manage only his own calls and statistics, but not other agents’ in the queue extension. In the image below, User 1000 is a queue agent and can see only his own information in the Switchboard.

Global Queue Settings

As explained before, under this section users can configure the feature codes for Dynamic agent login and logout, and also can now customize the keys for virtual queue options like shown below.

Dynamic Agent Login Settings
Agent Login Code Suffix	Configure the code to dial after the queue extension to log into the queue (i.e. queue extension + suffix). If no suffix is configured, dynamic agents will not be able to log in
Agent Logout Code Suffix	Configure the code to dial after the queue extension to log out of the queue (i.e. queue extension + suffix). If no suffix is configured, dynamic agents will not be able to log out.
Virtual Queue Callback Key Settings
Enable	Select whether to enable or disable virtual queue callback feature. By default it’s disabled.
Call Back Current Number	Press the feature key configured to set your current number as callback number.
Custom Callback Number	Press these feature key configured to set a custom callback number.
Continue Waiting	Press the feature key configured to continue waiting.

PICKUP GROUPS

The UCM630X supports pickup group feature which allows users to pick up incoming calls for other extensions if they are in the same pickup group, by dialing “Pickup Extension” feature code (by default *8).

Configure Pickup Groups

Pickup groups can be configured via Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪Pickup Groups.

• Click on to create a new pickup group.
• Click the button to upload the pickup group information in CSV format.
• Click the button to generate pickup group information in .CSV format.
• Click on to edit the pickup group.
• Click on to delete the pickup group.

Select extensions from the list on the left side to the right side.

Configure Pickup Feature Code

When picking up the call for the pickup group member, the user only needs to dial the pickup feature code. It is not necessary to add the extension number after the pickup feature code. The pickup feature code is configurable under Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪Feature Codes.

The default feature code for call pickup extension is *8, otherwise if the person intending to pick up the call knows the ringing extension they can use ** followed by the extension number in order to perform the call pickup operation. The following figure shows where you can customize these features codes

MUSIC ON HOLD

Music On Hold settings can be accessed via Web GUI🡪PBX Settings🡪Music On Hold. In this page, users could configure music on hold class and upload music files. The “default” Music On Hold class already has 5 audio files defined for users to use.

• Click on “Create New MOH Class” to add a new Music On Hold class.
• Click on to configure the MOH class sort method to be “Alpha” or “Random” for the sound files.
• Click on next to the selected Music On Hold class to delete this Music On Hold class.
• Click on to start uploading. Users can upload:
• Single files with 8KHz Mono Music file, or
• Music on hold files in a compressed package with .tar, .tar.gz and .tgz as the suffix. The file name can only be letters, digits, or special characters -_
• the size for the uploaded file should be less than 30M, the compressed file will be applied to the entire MoH.
• Users could also download all the music on hold files from UCM. In the Music On Hold page, click on
  and the file will be downloaded to your local PC.
• Click on to disable it from the selected Music On Hold Class.
• Click on to enable it from the selected Music On Hold Class.
• Select the sound files and click on to delete all selected Music On Hold files.

The UCM630X allows Users to select the Music On Hold file from WebGUI to play it. The UCM630X will initiate a call to the selected extension and play this Music On Hold file once the call is answered.

Steps to play the Music On Hold file:

1. Click on the button for the Music On Hold file.
2. In the prompted window, select the extension to playback and click .

3. The selected extension will ring.
4. Answer the call to listen to the music playback.

Users could also record their own Music On Hold to override an existing custom prompt, this can be done by following those steps:

1. Click on .
2. A message of confirmation will pop up, as shown below.

3. Click .
4. In the prompted window, select the extension to playback and click .

5. Answer the call and start to record your new music on hold.
6. Hangup the call and refresh Music On Hold page then you can listen to the new recorded file.

BUSY CAMP-ON

The UCM630X supports busy camp-on/call completion feature that allows the PBX to camp on a called party and inform the caller as soon as the called party becomes available given the previous attempted call has failed.

The configuration and instructions on how to use busy camp-on/call completion feature can be found in the following guide:

https://documentation.grandstream.com/knowledge-base/busy-camp-on-2/

PRESENCE

UCM does support SIP presence feature which allows users to advertise their current availability status and willingness to receive calls, this way other users can use their phones in order to monitor the presence status of each user and decide whether to call them or not based on their advertised availability.

This feature is different than BLF which is used to monitor the dialog status for each extension (Ringing, Idle or Busy). Instead the SIP presence module gives more options for users to choose which state they want to put themselves in.

In order to configure the presence status of an extension from the web GUI, users can access the menu of configuration using one of the two following methods:

• From admin account, go under the menu Extension/Trunk🡪Extensions and choose the desired extension to edit then navigate to the “Features” tab.

OR

• From the User Portal, go under the menu Basic Information🡪Extensions and navigate to the Features tab to have the following options.

Select which status to set from the presence status selection drop list, six options are available and below is a brief description of these states:

Available	The contact is online and can participate in conversations/phone calls.
Away	The contact is currently away (ex: for lunch break).
Chat	The contact has limited conversation flexibility and can only be reached via chat.
Do Not Disturb	The Contact is on DND (Do Not Disturb) mode.
Custom Presence Status	Please enter the presence status for this mode on the Web GUI. Up to 64 characters.
Unavailable	The contact is unreachable for the moment, please try to contact later.

Another option to set the presence status and which is more practical is using the feature code from the user’s phone, one the user dials the feature code (default is *48), a prompt will be played to select which status they want to put themselves in, by pressing the corresponding key.

The feature code can be enabled and customized from the Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪Feature Codes.

When a user does change his/her SIP presence status by making a call using presence feature code, the UCM will create a corresponding CDR entry showing the call as Action type = PRSENCE_STATUS.

FOLLOW ME

Follow Me is a feature on the UCM630X that allows users to direct calls to other phone numbers and have them ring all at once or one after the other. Calls can be directed to users’ home phone, office phone, mobile and etc. The calls will get to the user no matter where they are. Follow Me option can be found under extension settings page Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Extensions.

To configure follow me:

1. Choose the extension and click on .
2. Go to the Follow me tab to add destination numbers and enable the feature.

3. Click on to add local extensions or external numbers to be called after ringing the extension selected in the first step.
4. Once created, it will be displayed on the follow me list. And you can click on to delete the Follow Me.

The following table shows the Follow Me configuration parameters:

Enable	Configure to enable or disable Follow Me for this user.
Skip Trunk Auth	If external number is added in the Follow Me, please make sure this option is enabled or the “Skip Trunk Auth” option of the extension is enabled, otherwise the external Follow Me number cannot be reached.
Music On Hold Class	Configure the Music On Hold class that the caller would hear while tracking users
Confirm When Answering	By default, it is enabled, and user will be asked to press 1 to accept the call or to press 2 to reject the call after answering a Follow Me call. If it is disabled, the Follow Me call will be established once after the user answers.
Enable Destination	When enabled, the call will be routed to the default destination if no one in the Follow Me extensions answers the call.
Default Destination	Configure the destination if no one in the Follow Me extensions answers the call. The available options are: Extension Voicemail Queues Ring Group Voicemail Group IVR External Number
Follow Me Numbers	The added numbers are listed here. Click on to arrange the order. Click on to delete the number. Click on to add new numbers.
New Follow Me Number	Add a new Follow Me number which could be a ‘Local Extension’ or ‘External Number’. The selected dial plan should have permissions to dial the defined external number.
Dialing Order	Select the order in which the Follow Me destinations will be dialed to reach the user: ring all at once or ring one after the other.

Click on “Follow Me Options” under Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Extension page to enable or disable the options listed in the following table.

Playback Incoming Status Message	If enabled, the PBX will playback the incoming status message before starting the Follow Me steps.
Record the Caller’s Name	If enabled, the PBX will record the caller’s name from the phone so it can be announced to the callee in each step.
Playback Unreachable Status Message	If enabled, the PBX will playback the unreachable status message to the caller if the callee cannot be reached.

SPEED DIAL

Add Speed Dial

The UCM630X supports Speed Dial feature that allows users to call a certain destination by pressing one or four digits on the keypad. This creates a system-wide speed dial access for all the extensions on the UCM630X.

To enable Speed Dial, on the UCM630X Web GUI, go to page Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪Speed Dial.

User should first click on . Then decide from one digit up to four digits combination used for Speed Dial and select a dial destination from “Default Destination”. The supported destinations include extension, voicemail, conference room, voicemail group, IVR, ring group, call queue, page group, DISA, Dial by Name and external number.

The following can be configured as the default destination of a speed dial:

• Extension: Choose the extension to call when dialing the speed dial number.
• Multimedia Meeting: Choose the meeting room extension to call when dialing the speed dial number.
• Voicemail: Choose the extension which voicemail will be accessed to when dialing the speed dial number.
• Voicemail Group: Choose the voicemail group which will be accessed when dialing the speed dial number.
• IVR: Choose the IVR which will be accessed when dialing the speed dial number.
• Ring Group: Choose the ring group which will be called when dialing the speed dial number
• Queues: Choose the queue which will be called when dialing the speed dial number.
• Paging/Intercom: Choose the paging/intercom group which will be initiated when the speed dial number is dialed.
• Fax: Select the fax extension which will be used as a destination when the speed dial number is dialed.
• DISA: Choose DISA as the destination when the speed dial number is dialed.
• Dial By Name: Choose Dial By Name as the dialing destination.
• Announcement: Choose an announcement as the destination when the speed dial number is dialed.
• External Number: Enter an external number to call when the speed dial number is dialed.
• Custom Number: Choose a custom number to call when the speed dial number is dialed. This can also be a feature code.

Import Speed Dial

The user can import speed dial entries from a csv file, this reduces the amount of configuring the same speed dial entries on different UCMs. To do this, please click on “Import” as the figure below shows.

Then select the csv file of the speed dial entries and click

Export Speed Dial

To export speed dial entries, please click on export as the screenshot below shows, then choose the location where to save the csv file.

DISA

In many situations, the user will find the need to access his own IP PBX resources, but he is not physically near one of his extensions. However, he does have access to his own cell phone. In this case, we can use what is commonly known as DISA (Direct Inward System Access). Under this scenario, the user will be able to call from the outside, whether it is using his cell phone, pay phone, regular PSTN, etc. After calling into UCM630X, the user can then dial out via the SIP trunk or PSTN trunk connected to UCM630X as it is an internal extension.

The UCM630X supports DISA to be used in IVR or inbound route. Before using it, create new DISA under Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪DISA.

• Click on to add a new DISA.
• Click on to edit the DISA configuration.
• Click on to delete the DISA.

The following table details the parameters to set and configure DISA feature on UCM630X PBX.

Once successfully created, users can configure the inbound route destination as “DISA” or IVR key event as “DISA”. When dialing into DISA, users will be prompted with password first. After entering the correct password, a second dial tone will be heard for the users to dial out.

EMERGENCY

Emergency Calls

UCM supports configuration and management of numbers to be called in emergency situation, thus bypassing the regular outbound call routing process and allowing users in critical situation to dial out for emergency help with the possibility to have redundant trunks as point of exit in case one of the lines is down.

UCM63xx series are fully compliant with Kari’s Law and Ray Baum’s Act, for more information, please refer to the following links:

https://www.fcc.gov/mlts-911-requirements

https://documentation.grandstream.com/knowledge-base/emergency-calls/

In addition, Emergency calls can be automatically recorded by toggling on the new Auto Record and recordings can be viewed in the new Emergency Recordings tab on the same page. Additionally, users can have these recordings be sent to the configured email address(es).

Email alerts are also supported after enabling the notification for the event under “Maintenance 🡪 System Events”

To configure emergency numbers, users need to follow below steps:

1. Navigate on the web GUI under “Call Features 🡪 Emergency Calls”
2. Click on to add a new emergency number.
3. Configure the required fields “Name, Emergency Number and Trunk(s) to be used to reach the number”.
4. Save and apply the configuration.

The table below gives more description of the configuration Parameters when creating emergency numbers.

Emergency Recordings

UCM6300 Series allows recording emergency calls and they can be found under WebUI → Call Feature → Emergency Calls → Emergency Recordings

Emergency Location Mapping

In compliance with Kari’s Law and the Ray Baum’s Act, UCM’s Emergency Calls feature now supports
emergency location mapping. This will allow users to associate subnets with emergency location
identification numbers (ELINs), which can then be used by E911 service providers for example to determine
the location of callers. The new options can be found under Call Features→Emergency
Calls→Emergency Location Mapping.

• ELIN: The emergency location identification number registered with the E911 provider. This number will be sent out as the emergency call’s CID number.
• Subnet: The network subnet that the ELIN will be associated with. The ELIN that is sent to E911 providers is based on the subnet that a calling endpoint is registered from. Example: “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/24” or “xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx/64”.
• Location: Location associated with the configured subnet. This is used for the UCM administrator’s reference.
• Geolocation Routing: Toggles whether to include the Geolocation header in the emergency call SIP INVITE message. The Location field value will be used as the Geolocation header value.

CALLBACK

Callback is designed for users who often use their mobile phones to make long distance or international calls which may have high service charges. The callback feature provides an economic solution for reduce the cost from this.

The callback feature works as follows:

1. Configure a new callback on the UCM630X.
2. On the UCM630X, configure destination of the inbound route for analog trunk to callback.
3. Save and apply the settings.
4. The user calls the PSTN number of the UCM630X using the mobile phone, which goes to callback destination as specified in the inbound route.
5. Once the user hears the ringback tone from the mobile phone, hang up the call on the mobile phone.
6. The UCM630X will call back the user.
7. The user answers the call.
8. The call will be sent to DISA or IVR which directs the user to dial the destination number.
9. The user will be connected to the destination number.

In this way, the calls are placed and connected through trunks on the UCM630X instead of to the mobile phone directly. Therefore, the user will not be charged on mobile phone services for long distance or international calls.

To configure callback on the UCM630X, go to Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪Callback page and click on . Configuration parameters are listed in the following table.

BLF AND EVENT LIST

BLF

The UCM630X supports BLF monitoring for extensions, ring group, call queue, conference room and parking lot. For example, on the user’s phone, configure the parking lot number 701 as the BLF monitored number. When there is a parked call on 701, the LED for this BLF key will light up in red, meaning a call is parked against this parking lot. Pressing this BLF key can pick up the call from this parking lot.

Event List

Besides BLF, users can also configure the phones to monitor event list. In this way, both local extensions on the same UCM630X and remote extensions on the VOIP trunk can be monitored. The event list setting is under Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪Event List.

• Click on “Add” to add a new event list.
• Sort selected extensions manually in the Eventlist
• Click on to edit the event list configuration.
• Click on to delete the event list.

Remote extension monitoring works on the UCM630X via event list BLF, among Peer SIP trunks or Register SIP trunks (register to each other). Therefore, please properly configure SIP trunks on the UCM630X first before using remote BLF feature. Please note the SIP end points need support event list BLF in order to monitor remote extensions.

When an event list is created on the UCM630X and remote extensions are added to the list, the UCM630X will send out SIP SUBSCRIBE to the remote UCM630X to obtain the remote extension status. When the SIP end points register and subscribe to the local UCM630X event list, it can obtain the remote extension status from this event list. Once successfully configured, the event list page will show the status of total extension and subscribers for each event list. Users can also select the event URI to check the monitored extension’s status and the subscribers’ details.

DIAL BY NAME

Dial by Name is a feature on the PBX that allows caller to search a person by first or last name via his/her phone’s keypad. The administrator can define the Dial by Name directory including the desired extensions in the directory and the searching type by “first name” or “last name”. After dialing in, the PBX IVR/Auto Attendant will guide the caller to spell the digits to find the person in the Dial by Name directory. This feature allows customers/clients to use the guided automatic system to contact the enterprise employees without having to know the extension number, which brings convenience and improves business image for the enterprise.

Dial by Name Configuration

The administrators can create the dial by name group under Web GUI🡪Call Features🡪Dial By Name.

1. Name

Enter a Name to identify the Dial by Name group.

2. Extension

Configure the direct dial extension for the Dial By Name group.

3. Custom Prompt

This option sets a custom prompt for directory to announce to a caller. The file can be uploaded from the page “Custom Prompt”. Click “Upload Audio File” to add additional record.

4. Available Extensions/Selected Extensions

Select available extensions from the left side to the right side as the directory for the Dial By Name group. Only the selected extensions here can be reached by the Dial By Name IVR when dialing into this group. The extensions here must have a valid first name and last name configured under Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Extensions in order to be searchable in Dial By Name directory through IVR. By specifying the extensions here, the administrators can make sure unscreened calls will not reach the company employee if he/she does not want to receive them directly.

5. Prompt Wait Time

Configure “Prompt Wait Time” for Dial By Name feature. During Dial By Name call, the caller will need to input the first letters of First/Last name before this wait time is reached. Otherwise, timeout will occur, and the call might hang up. The timeout range is between 3 and 60 seconds.

6. Query Type

Specify the query type. This defines how the caller will need to enter to search the directory.

By First Name: enter the first 3 digits of the first name to search the directory.

By Last Name: enter the first 3 digits of the last name to search the directory.

7. Select Type

Specify the select type on the searching result. The IVR will confirm the name/number for the party the caller would like to reach before dialing out.

By Order: After the caller enters the digits, the IVR will announce the first matching party’s name and number. The caller can confirm and dial out if it is the destination party, or press * to listen to the next matching result if it is not the desired party to call.

By Menu: After the caller enters the digits, the IVR will announce 8 matching results. The caller can press number 1 to 8 to select and call or press 9 for results in next page.

The Dial by Name group can be used as the destination for inbound route and key pressing event for IVR. The group name defined here will show up in the destination list when configuring IVR and inbound route. If Dial by Name is set as a key pressing event for IVR, user could use ‘*’ to exit from Dial by Name, then re-enter IVR and start a new event. The following example shows how to use this option.

Please refer to [Username Prompt Customization] for Username Prompt Customization.

ACTIVE CALLS AND MONITOR

The active calls on the UCM630X are displayed in Web GUI🡪System Status🡪Active Calls page. Users can monitor the status, hang up the call as well as barge in the active calls in real time manner.

Active Calls Status

To view the status of active calls, navigate to Web GUI🡪System Status🡪Active Calls. The following figure shows extension 1004 is calling 1000. 1000 is ringing.

The following figure shows the call between 1000 and 5555 is established.

The gray color of the active call means the connection of call time is less than half an hour. It means this call is normal.

The orange color of the active call means the connection of call time is greater than half an hour but less than one hour. It means this call is a bit long.

The red color of the active call means the connection of call time is more than one hour. It means this call could be abnormal.

Hang Up Active Calls

To hang up an active call, click on icon in the active call dialog. Users can also click on to hang up all active calls.

Call Monitor

During an active call, click on icon and the monitor dialog will pop up.

In the “Monitor” dialog, configure the following to monitor an active call:

1. Enter an available extension for “Monitor’s Extension” which will be used to monitor the active call.
2. “Monitored Extension” must be one of the parties in the active call to be monitored.
3. Select spy mode. There are three options in “Spy Mode”.

• Listen

In “Listen” mode, the extension monitoring the call can hear both parties in the active call but the audio of the user on this extension will not be heard by either party in the monitored active call.

• Whisper

In “Whisper” mode, the extension monitoring the call can hear both parties in the active call. The user on this extension can only talk to the selected monitored extension and he/she will not be heard by the other party in the active call. This can be usually used to supervise calls.

• Barge

In “Barge” mode, the extension monitoring the call can talk to both parties in the active call. The call will be established similar to three-way conference.

4. Enable or disable “Require Confirmation” option. If enabled, the confirmation of the invited monitor’s extension is required before the active call can be monitored. This option can be used to avoid adding participant who has auto-answer configured, or call forwarded to voicemail.
5. Click on “Add”. An INVITE will be sent to the monitor’s extension. The monitor can answer the call and start monitoring. If “Require Confirmation” is enabled, the user will be asked to confirm to monitor the call.

Another way to monitor active calls is to dial the corresponding feature codes from an extension. Please refer to [UCM630X Feature Codes] and [Call Recording] section for instructions.

CALL FEATURES

The UCM630X supports call recording, transfer, call forward, call park and other call features via feature code. This section lists all the feature codes in the UCM630X and describes how to use the call features.

Feature Codes

The UCM630X also allows user to one click enable / disable specific feature code as shown below:

Parking Lot

User can create parking lots and their related slots under Web GUI🡪 Call Features🡪 Parking Lot. In the Parking Lot page, users can create lots of their own. This allows different groups within an organization to have their own parking lots instead of sharing one large parking lot with others. While creating a new parking lot, users can assign it a range that they think is appropriate for the group that will use the parking lot.

User can create a new Parking lot by clicking on button “Add” :

Parking Lot Extension	Default Extension: 700 During an active call, initiate blind transfer and then enter this code to park the call.
Parking Lot Name	Set a name to the parking lot
Parked Slots	Default Extension: 701-720 These are the extensions where the calls will be parked, i.e., parking lots that the parked calls can be retrieved.
Use Parklot as Extension	If checked, the parking lot number can be used as extension. The user can transfer the call to the parking lot number to park the call. Please note this parking lot number range might conflict with extension range.
Parking Timeout (s)	Default setting is 300 seconds, and the maximum limit is 99.999 seconds. This is the timeout allowed for a call to be parked. After the timeout, if the call is not picked up, the extension who parks the call will be called back.
Music On Hold Classes	Select the Music on Hold Class.
Failover Destination	Configures a callback failover destination when the extension that is called back is busy. The call will be routed to the destination number and this reduces the chance of dropping parked calls.
Ring All Callback on Timeout	If enabled, all registered endpoints of the extension will ring when callback occurs. Otherwise, only the original endpoint will be called back.
Forward to destination on timeout	If enabled, the call will be routed to the configured destination upon timeout. Otherwise, the call will be routed back to the original caller.
Timeout Destination	This option appears once Forward to Destination on Timeout is enabled. Upon park timeout, the call will be routed to the configured destination.
Parking Lot Timeout Alert-Info	Adds an Alert-Info header to parking lot callbacks after the Parking Timeout has been reached.

Call Park

The UCM630X provides call park and call pickup features via feature code.

Park a Call

There are two feature codes that can be used to park the call.

• Feature Maps🡪Call Park (Default code #72)

During an active call, press #72 and the call will be parked. Parking lot number (default range 701 to 720) will be announced after parking the call.

• Feature Misc🡪Call Park (Default code 700)

During an active call, initiate blind transfer (default code #1) and then dial 700 to park the call. Parking lot number (default range 701 to 720) will be announced after parking the call.

Retrieve Parked Call

To retrieve the parked call, simply dial the parking lot number and the call will be established. If a parked call is not retrieved after the timeout, the original extension who parks the call will be called back.

Monitor Call Park CID Name Information (GXP21xx, GRP261x Phones Only)

Users can see the CID name information of parked calls. VPK/MPKs must be configured as “Monitored Call Park” with the desired parking lot extension. The display will alternate between displaying the parking lot extension and the call’s CID name. There is no need to configure anything on the UCM.

Call Recording

The UCM630X allows users to record audio during the call. If “Auto Record” is turned on for an extension, ring group, call queue or trunk, the call will be automatically recorded when there is established call with it. Otherwise, please follow the instructions below to manually record the call.

1. Make sure the feature code for “Start/Stop Call Recording” is configured and enabled.
2. After establishing the call, enter the “Start/Stop Call Recording” feature code (by default it is *3) followed by # or SEND to start recording.
3. To stop the recording, enter the “Start/Stop Call Recording” feature code (by default it is *3) followed by # or SEND again. Or the recording will be stopped once the call hangs up.
4. The recording file can be retrieved under Web GUI🡪CDR. Click on to show and play the recording or click on to download the recording file.

The above recorded call’s recording files are also listed under the UCM630X Web GUI🡪CDR🡪Recording Files.

Enable Spy

If “Enable Spy” option is enabled, feature codes for Listen Spy, Whisper Spy and Barge Spy are available for users to dial from any extension to perform the corresponding actions.

Assume a call is on-going between extension A and extension B, user could dial the feature code from extension C to listen on their call (*54 by default), whisper to one side (*55 by default), or barge into the call (*56 by default). Then the user will be asked to enter the number to call, which should be either side of the active call, extension A or B in this example.

Shared Call Appearance (SCA)

Shared Call Appearance (SCA) functionality has been added to the UCM. With SCA, users can assign multiple devices to one extension, configure endpoints to monitor that extension, make actions on behalf of that extension such as viewing call status and placing and receiving calls, and even barging into existing calls. To configure the SCA functionality, please follow the steps below:

1. Users can enable SCA by navigating to the Extensions page, editing the desired extension, and enabling the option SCA.

2. After enabling the option, navigate to Call Features🡪SCA. The newly enabled SCA extension will be listed. Click the “+” button under the Options column to add a number that will share the main extension’s call appearance, which will be called private numbers.

3. Configure the private number as desired.

4. Once the private number has been created, users must now register a device to it. To properly register a device to the private number, use the configured private number as the SIP User ID. Auth ID and Password will be the same as the main extensions. Once registration is complete, SCA is now configured.

5. Next, configure the VPK or MPK to Shared for both the main extension and the private number. SCA is now configured for both endpoint devices.

The following table describe the SCA Number configuration setting:

Private Number	Configures the private number for the SCA.
Related Shared Line	Display the related shared line.
Enable This Number	Whether enable this private number. If not enabled, this private number is only record in DB, it will not affect other system feature.
Allow Origination from This Number	Enable this option will allow calling from this private number. By default, it is enabled.
Allow Termination to This Number	Enable this option will allows calls to this private number. By default, it is enabled.

The following table describes the options available when editing the SCA number:

Shared Line Number	While SCA is enabled, this number will be the same as the extension number.
Allow Call Retrieve from Another Location	Allows remote call retrieval. Must be enabled in public hold. By default, it is enabled.
Alert All Appearances for Group Paging Calls	Allows all SCA group members to ring when the SCA shared number is paged. If disabled, only the SCA shared number will ring when paged. By default, it is disabled.
Multiple Call Arrangement	Allows simultaneous calls in an SCA group. By default, it is disabled.
Allow Bridging between Locations	Allows location bridging for SCA group. Must be enabled when using the Barge-In feature. By default, it is disabled.
Bridge Warning Tone	Configures the notification in the bridge when another party join. None: No notification sound. Barge-In only: Notification sound will play when another party join. Barge-In and Repeat: Notification sound will play when another party joins and repeat every 30 seconds. By default, it is set to “Barge-In Only”.

ANNOUNCEMENT

The Announcement feature (not to be confused with Announcement Paging and Announcement Center) is a feature that allows users to set an unskippable audio file to play to callers before routing them to a configured destination. Announcements can be configured as a destination in the Inbound Routes page.

To configure Announcement, users need to follow below steps:

1. Navigate on the web GUI under “Call Features 🡪 Announcement”
2. Click on to add a new Announcement.
3. Configure the required fields Name, Prompt, Default Destination to be used for the announcement.

Save and apply the configuration.

The table below gives more description of the configuration parameters when creating Announcement.

Name	Configure the name of the Announcement.
Prompt	Choose/upload the audio file to play when the call reaches this announcement.
Default Destination	Select the destination which the call will be forwarded to after the announce has been played.

PBX SETTINGS

This section describes internal options that have not been mentioned in previous sections yet. The settings in this section can be applied globally to the UCM630X, including general configurations, jitter buffer, RTP settings, ports config and STUN monitor. The options can be accessed via Web GUI🡪PBX Settings🡪General Settings.

General Settings

RTP Settings

RTP Settings

Internal Options/RTP Settings

Payload

The UCM630X payload type for audio codecs and video codes can be configured here.

AAL2-G.726	Configure payload type for ADPCM (G.726, 32kbps, AAL2 codeword packing). The default setting is 112.
DTMF	Configured payload type for DTMF. The default setting is 101.
G.721 Compatible	Configure to enable/disable G.721 compatible. The default setting is Yes.
G.726	Configure the payload type for G.726 if “G.721 Compatible” is disabled. The default setting is 111.
iLBC	Configure the payload type for iLBC. The default setting is 97.
OPUS	Configure the payload type for OPUS. The default setting is 123.
Audio FEC Payload Type	Configure the Audio FEC Payload Type. The default setting is 127
Audio RED Payload Type	Configure the Audio RED Payload Type. Default setting is 122
H.264	Configure the payload type for H.264. The default setting is 99.
H.263P	Configure the payload type for H.263+. The default setting is 100 103.
VP8	Configure the payload type for VP8. The default setting is 108.
Main Video FEC	Configure the Main Video FEC
RTP FECC	Configure the RTP FECC
RTX	Configure the RTX
G.722.1	G.722.1：Low-complexity coder, 24kbps.
G.722.1C	G.722.1C：Low-complexity coder, 48kbps.

Call Failure Tone Settings

SIP Trunk Prompt Tone

Prompt Tone Settings tab has been added to the UCM to help users choose which prompt will be played by the UCM during call failure, the following voice message responses have been added and can be set to be played for 4XX, 5XX, and 6XX call failures:

• Default for 404 and 604 status codes: “Your call can’t be completed as dialed. Please check the number and dial again.”
• Default for 5xx status codes: “Server error. Please check your device.”
• Default for 403 and 603 status codes: “The call was rejected by the server. Please try again later.”
• Default for all other status codes: “All circuits are busy now. Please try again later.”

Additionally, custom voice messages recorded and uploaded in PBX Settings🡪Voice Prompt🡪Custom Prompt can be used for these failure responses instead of the default messages.

General Call Prompt Tones

Moreover, users also have the possibility to customize the prompt for typical call failure reasons like (no permission to allow outbound calls, busy lines, incorrect number dialed …Etc.).

To customize these prompts user could record and upload their own files under “’PBX Settings 🡪 Voice Prompt 🡪 Custom Prompts” then select each one for specific call failure case under “PBX Settings -> Call Prompt Tones 🡪 General Call Prompt Tones” page as shown on the following figure:

FILE MANAGER

UCM supports automatic or manual recording of calls and storage of IM chat files. Only recording files and IM files can be stored locally or on the GDMS, meanwhile, video recording files can only be stored on NAS. Local storage means that the files will be stored in the internal memory of the UCM. For extra storage capacity the user can plug a USB flash drive or an SD card, the UCM will always store in the USB drive first, then the SD card. In case no storage drive is attached, it will automatically start storing the files internally.

• If “Enable Auto Change” is selected, the files will be automatically saved in the available USB Disk or SD card plugged into the UCM630x. If both USB Disk and SD card are plugged in, the files will be always saved in the USB Disk.
• When “Enable Auto Change” is enabled, the option “Storage Path Priority“will appear. It allows the user to configure the priority of each storage unit in the priority list (The storage on top of the list has the highest priority). The default priority list is GDMS Cloud Storage > NAS > USB 1 > USB > SD Card > Local
• If “Local” is selected, the files will be stored in UCM630x internal storage. If a storage drive is inserted, the UCM63xx will store the files into the storage drive instead of internal storage. Priority list is USB drive, then SD Card.
• If “GDMS Cloud Storage” is selected, data will no longer be stored locally and if you need to listen to the recording, download the file to the computer side and play it offline.

Once “USB Disk” or “SD Card” is selected, click on “OK”. The user will be prompted to confirm to copy the local files to the external storage device.

Click on “OK” to continue. The users will be prompted a new dialog to select the categories for the files to be copied over.

On the UCM630X, users have the following options when select the categories to copy the files to the external device:

• Recording Files: Copy the normal recording files to the external device.
• Conference: Copy the conference recording files to the external device.
• Queue: Copy the call queue recording files to the external device.
• All: Copy all recording files to the external device.

ONLINE STORAGE

NAS

The UCM supports adding and backing up recordings to a network-attached storage (NAS) server. Following table describes NAS settings:

SFTP

SFTP integration offers sychronizing files between from the UCM to the SFTP server. SFTP is used to synchronize the following data: CDR Records, Recording Files, Voicemail, and Fax.

SIP SETTINGS

The UCM630X SIP global settings can be accessed via Web GUI🡪PBX Settings🡪SIP Settings.

General

MISC

Session Timer

Force Timer	If checked, always request, and run session timer.
Timer	If checked, run session timer only when requested by other UA.
Session Expire	Configure the maximum session refresh interval (in seconds). Default is 1800.
Min SE	Configure the minimum session refresh interval (in seconds). The default setting is 90.

TCP & TLS

NAT

External Host	Configure a static IP address and port (optional) used in outbound SIP messages if the UCM630X is behind NAT. If it is a host name, it will only be looked up once.
Use IP address in SDP	If enabled, the SDP connection will use the IP address resolved from the external host.
External UDP Port	Configure externally mapped UDP port when the PBX is behind a static NAT or PAT.
External TCP Port	Configure the externally mapped TCP port when the UCM630X is behind a static NAT or PAT.
External TLS Port	Configures the externally mapped TLS port when UCM630X is behind a static NAT or PAT.
Local Network Address	Specify a list of network addresses that are considered inside of the NAT network. Multiple entries are allowed. If not configured, the external IP address will not be set correctly. A sample configuration could be as follows: 192.168.0.0/16

ToS

ToS for SIP	Configure the Type of Service for SIP packets. The default setting is None.
ToS for RTP Audio	Configure the Type of Service for RTP audio packets. The default setting is None.
ToS for RTP Video	Configure the Type of Service for RTP video packets. The default setting is None.
Default Incoming/Outgoing Registration Time	Configure the default duration (in seconds) of incoming/outgoing registration. The default setting is 120.
Max Registration/Subscription Time	Configure the maximum duration (in seconds) of incoming registration and subscription allowed by the UCM630X. The default setting is 3600.
Min Registration/Subscription Time	Configure the minimum duration (in seconds) of incoming registration and subscription allowed by the UCM630X. The default setting is 60.
Enable Relaxed DTMF	Select to enable relaxed DTMF handling. The default setting is “No”.
DTMF Mode	Select DTMF mode to send DTMF. The default setting is RFC4733. If “Info” is selected, SIP INFO message will be used. If “Inband” is selected, a-law or u-law are required. When “Auto” is selected, “RFC4733” will be used if offered, otherwise “Inband” will be used. The default setting is “RFC4733”.
RTP Timeout	During an active call, if there is no RTP activity within the timeout (in seconds), the call will be terminated. The default setting is no timeout. Note: This setting does not apply to calls on hold.
RTP Hold Timeout	When the call is on hold, if there is no RTP activity within the timeout (in seconds), the call will be terminated. This value of RTP Hold Timeout should be larger than RTP Timeout. The default setting is no timeout.
RTP Keep-alive	This feature can be used to avoid abnormal call drop when the remote provider requires RTP traffic during proceeding. For example, when the call goes into voicemail and there is no RTP traffic sent out from UCM, configuring this option can avoid voicemail drop. When configured, RTP keep-alive packet will be sent to remote party at the configured interval. If set to 0, RTP keep-alive is disabled.
100rel	Configure the 100rel setting on UCM630X. The default setting is “Yes”.
Trust Remote Party ID	Configure whether the Remote-Party-ID should be trusted. The default setting is “No”.
Send Remote Party ID	Configure whether the Remote-Party-ID should be sent or not. The default setting is “No”.
Generate In-Band Ringing	Configure whether the UCM630X should generate Inband ringing or not. The default setting is “Never”. Yes: The UCM630X will send 180 Ringing followed by 183 Session Progress and in-band audio. No: The UCM630X will send 180 Ringing if 183 Session Progress has not been sent yet. If audio path is established already with 183 then send in-band ringing. Never: Whenever ringing occurs, the UCM630X will send 180 Ringing as long as 200OK has not been set yet. Inband ringing will not be generated even the end point device is not working properly.
Server User Agent	Configure the user agent string for the UCM630X.
Send Compact SIP Headers	If enabled, compact SIP headers will be sent. The default setting is “No”.
Passthrough PAI Header	Passthrough PAI Header

STIR/SHAKEN

To prevent robocalls, UCM now supports STIR/SHAKE protocols. Related options have been added as a new tab in the SIP Settings page.

Clicking on the Add button will show the following window:

Clicking on the Certificate Settings button will bring up the following window:

Certificate Download Time (s)	Configure the public key download timeout period, the default value is 2 seconds.
Signature Valid Time (s)	Configure the validity period of the digital signature, the default value is 15 seconds.
Private Key	Configure the Private key. Note: The uploaded file must be less than 2MB in file size, only supports the .key format and must be ECC type. This file will automatically be renamed to “private.key”.
Public Key	Configure the Public Key. Note: The uploaded file must be less than 2MB in file size, only supports the .crt format and must be ECC type. This file will automatically be renamed to “public.crt”.

Transparent Call-Info header

UCM supports transparent call info header in order to integrate GDS door system with GXP21XX/GRP261X phones, the UCM will forward the call-info header to the phone in order to request the live view from GDS door system and give the option to open the door via softkey.

IAX SETTINGS

The UCM630X IAX global settings can be accessed via Web GUI🡪PBX Settings🡪IAX Settings.

General

Bind Port	Configure the port number that the IAX2 will be allowed to listen to. The default setting is 4569.
Bind IPv4 Address	Force IAX2 to bind to a specific address instead of all addresses.
Bind IPv6 address	Configure the IPv6 address to bind to. “[::]” means to bind to all IP addresses.
IAX1 Compatibility	Select to configure IAX1 compatibility. The default setting is “No”.
No Checksums	If selected, UDP checksums will be disabled and no checksums will be calculated/checked on systems supporting this feature. The default setting is “No”.
Delay Reject	If enabled, the IAX2 will delay the rejection of calls to avoid DOS. The default setting is “No”.
ADSI	Select to enable ADSI phone compatibility. The default setting is “No”.
Music On Hold Interpret	Specify which Music On Hold class this channel would like to listen to when being put on hold. This music class is only effective if this channel has no music class configured and the bridged channel putting the call on hold has no “Music On Hold Suggest” setting.
Music On Hold Suggest	Specify which Music On Hold class to suggest to the bridged channel when putting the call on hold.
Bandwidth	Configure the bandwidth for IAX settings. The default setting is “Low”.

Registration

IAX Registration Options
Min Reg Expire	Configure the minimum period (in seconds) of registration. The default setting is 60.
Max Reg Expire	Configure the maximum period (in seconds) of registration. The default setting is 3600.
IAX Thread Count	Configure the number of IAX helper threads. The default setting is 10.
IAX Max Thread Count	Configure the maximum number of IAX threads allowed. The default is 100.
Auto Kill	If enabled and no ACK is received for new messages after the specified wait time, the connection will be terminated.
Authentication Debugging	If enabled, authentication traffic in debugging will not show. The default is “No”.
Codec Priority	Configure codec negotiation priority. The default setting is “Reqonly”. Caller Consider the callers preferred order ahead of the host’s. Host Consider the host’s preferred order ahead of the caller’s. Disabled Disable the consideration of codec preference all together. Reqonly This is the same as “Disabled”, except when the requested format is not available. The call will only be accepted if the requested format is available.
Type of Service	Configure ToS bit for preferred IP routing.
IAX Trunk Options
Trunk Frequency	Configure the frequency of trunk frames (in milliseconds). The default is 20.
Trunk Time Stamps	If enabled, time stamps will be attached to trunk frames. The default is “No”.

Security

Call Token Optional	Enter a single IP address (e.g., 1.1.1.1) or a range of IP addresses (1.1.1.1/255.255.255.255) for which call token validation is not required.
Max Call Numbers	Configure the maximum number of calls allowed for a single IP address.
Max Unvalidated Call Numbers	Configure the maximum number of Unvalidated calls for all IP addresses.
Max Call Numbers	Configure to limit the number of calls for a give IP address of IP range.
IP or IP Range	Enter the IP address (1.1.1.1) or a range of IP addresses (1.1.1.1/255.255.255.255) to be considered for call number limits.

INTERFACE SETTINGS

Analog Hardware

The analog hardware (FXS port and FXO port) on the UCM630X will be listed in this page. Click on to edit signaling preference for FXS port or configure ACIM settings for FXO port.

Select “Loop Start” or “Kewl Start” for each FXS port. And then click on “Update” to save the change.

For FXO port, users could manually enter the ACIM settings by selecting the value from dropdown list for each port. Or users could click on “Detect” and choose the detection algorithm, two algorithms exist (ERL, Pr) for the UCM630X to automatically detect the ACIM value. The detecting value will be automatically filled into the settings.

Tone Region	Select country to set the default tones for dial tone, busy tone, ring tone and etc. to be sent from the FXS port. The default setting is “United States of America (USA)”.
Advanced Settings
FXO Opermode	Select country to set the On-Hook Speed, Ringer Impedance, Ringer Threshold, Current Limiting, TIP/RING voltage adjustment, Minimum Operational Loop Current, and AC Impedance as predefined for your country’s analog line characteristics. The default setting is “United States of America (USA)”.
FXS Opermode	Select country to set the On-Hook Speed, Ringer Impedance, Ringer Threshold, Current Limiting, TIP/RING voltage adjustment, Minimum Operational Loop Current, and AC Impedance as predefined for your country’s analog line characteristics. The default setting is “United States of America (USA)”.
FXS TISS Override	Configure to enable or disable override Two-Wire Impedance Synthesis (TISS). The default setting is No. If enabled, users can select the impedance value for Two-Wire Impedance Synthesis (TISS) override. The default setting is 600Ω.
PCMA Override	Select the codec to be used for analog lines. North American users should choose PCMU. All other countries, unless already known, should be assumed to be PCMA. The default setting is PCMU. Note: This option requires system reboot to take effect.
Boost Ringer	Configure whether normal ringing voltage (40V) or maximum ringing voltage (89V) for analog phones attached to the FXS port is required. The default setting is “Normal”.
Fast Ringer	Configure to increase the ringing speed to 25HZ. This option can be used with “Low Power” option. The default setting is “Normal”.
Low Power	Configure the peak voltage up to 50V during “Fast Ringer” operation. This option is used with “Fast Ringer”. The default setting is “Normal”.
Ring Detect	If set to “Full Wave”, false ring detection will be prevented for lines where Caller ID is sent before the first ring and proceeded by a polarity reversal, as in UK. The default setting is “Standard”.
FXS MWI Mode	Configure the type of Message Waiting Indicator on FXS lines. The default setting is “FSK”. FSK: Frequency Shift Key Indicator NEON: Light Neon Bulb Indicator.
FXO Frequency Tolerance	Allows users to adjust the tolerance of the FXO ringing frequency. 63Hz is considered the standard value and is selected by default.

DAHDI Settings

When users encounter issues such as audio delay in outbound calls using the analog trunk, they can adjust DAHDI settings on the UCM to attempt to lessen or resolve the issues.

For the value of the option such as “32, half”:

The number in the option indicates the number of read/write buffers for TDM (DAHDI).

The “Half”, “Immediate” or “Full” option indicates the strategy when reading/writing data from buffer.

• “Half”: Data will be read/written from buffer when half of the buffer is occupied with data.
• “Immediate”: Read/write from buffer whenever there is data occupying the buffer.
• “Full”: Data will be read/written from buffer when buffer is fully occupied with data.

Normally, DAHDI settings should be kept default and should be adjusted only when users encounter analog trunk/Fax-related issues.

CONTACTS

Address book management is under UCM web UI->Maintenance, and it has two sections “Contact Management” and “Department management”.

Contact Management

Contact management page displays extension contacts and external contacts information.

• Extension contacts

Extension contacts page shows all the extensions that has “Sync Contact” option enabled in extension settings page. The extension contacts here can be edited or deleted individually or in batch. No new extension contact can be added directly from this page. If an extension contact is deleted from this page, “Sync Contact” option is disabled from this extension. This will not delete the extension from UCM.

Click Edit icon to configure name, department, email address and etc for each extension contact.

• External contacts

On external contacts page, the admin can create single external contact, import contacts in batch, edit contacts, delete contacts and export contacts.

Click on “Export” icon, a CSV format file will be generated with the current external contacts.

Click on “import” icon, then follow the steps below to add external contacts in batch:

• Step 1: For option “On Duplicate External Contacts”, select whether to skip duplicate contact on the imported CSV file or update the duplicate UCM contact with the information in the CSV.
• Step 2: Choose file from local PC to upload.
• Step 3: Click on “Upload”.
• Step 4: Click on “Apply” to complete importing external contacts.

Department Management

Departments are organizational units that allows organizing extensions within groups that specify the specialty of a the extension owners within a company. This makes finding contacts easier within the UCM contact books.

Click on “Add” to create a new department. Configure the department name and select the superior department. By default the superior department is the root directory. If the UCM has cloud IM configured, the root directory will be the department in cloud IM.

On the department list:

• Click on to create sub department.
• Click on to add member to the department.
• Click on to edit the department.

If the UCM has Cloud IM enabled and configured, the following options will be available:

• Set as Shared Department: Toggles the shared status of the department. If there are existing cross-server members in this department, this option will be grayed out.
• Share to Following Sites: Select the sites (servers) to that will be allowed to move their extensions in and out of the shared deparmtent.
• Apply Settings to Sub-Level Departments: Only available when editing an exisiting deparmtent. Apply the same sharing settings to its sub-department. If a department has sharing enabled and is configured to be shared with specific sites, its sub-department will also have sharing enabled and be shared with the same sites.

Shared departments can be distinguished by an icon next to their name.

There are 3 potential marks in the center of that icon that represent the permission level that the current UCM has for that site

• : The + symbol indicates that the current UCM is the creator of the shared department. It has full management priviliges over it, which include the ability to edit it, delete it, add sub-departments under it, add its own extensions to it and remove any extensions from it, including extensions from other servers.
• : The checkmark symbol indicates that the department was shared to the current UCM has been authorized to move its own extensions in and out of department.
• : No symbol indicates that the department is from a UCM that is under the same Cloud IM account as the current UCM, but it has not been shared to the current UCM for management. The current UCM can only view this shared department and its members but cannot interact with it unless the shared depratment has the current UCM’s extensions as members. In this case, the current UCM can still remove members from the shared department.

If a UCM with a shared depratment no longer wants to use CloudIM, it must first do the following:

• If there are no cross-server memebers in its shared departments, it must set them as local departments and assign new parent departments to them.
• If there are existing cross-server members in its shared departments, it must assign the shared departments to another site for management.

If the UCM re-enables Cloud IM, it will not reclaim ownership of its original shared departments.

Shared Departments

Share departmens offer a centralized way for administrators to manage departments and members across multiple servers using the same Cloud IM account. To get started, make sure that the UCM has Cloud IM enabled and configured. Then, navigate to Contacts → Department Management, then add/edit a specific department.

Tick the option Set as Shared Department, then select the sites to which the department will be shared. If the user wishes to apply the same sharing settings to the departments nested under the parent department, please tick the option Apply Settings to Sub-Level Departments.

Privilege Management

The user can configure custom privileges other than the default ones (All contacts, Departments and sub-departments contacts). These custom privileges allow more flexible ways of allowing contacts to view all or specific contacts from other departments.

UCM admin can add or edit Privilege Management; under UCM web UI🡪Contacts Privilege Management, there are 2 default privileges:

• Visible to all contacts.
• Only the contact person’s department and sub-department contacts are visible.

When Cloud IM is enabled on the UCM, a third privilege becomes available to choose:

• Local Contacts: Restricts the contacts shown to the contacts of the local UCM.

MESSAGING

Live Chat

Live Chat feature allows to create chat channels that can be embedded on your website to enable your client to reach your customer service more easily. The client can contact your agents by text then

Message Broadcast

Message broadcast feature allows the administrator to broadcast a text message to all the endpoints selected by the administrator. The administrator can select departments or individual extensions to boardcast a text message.

DEVICE MANAGEMENT

IP Camera Devices

The UCM admin can add IPC devices and edit accessible extensions so these extensions can view the surveillance streams for the IPC devices.

Click on “Add” to add IPC device.

Edit the IPC device settings in the table below.

REMOTECONNECT

An integrated & important part of Grandstream’s GDMS cloud-based device management service which runs on Amazon Web Services (AWS) with 99.999% reliability, the UCM RemoteConnect cloud service supports hassle-free Work-From-Home audio/video communications & collaborations using WebRTC-based license-free “Grandstream Wave” softphones for desktop/Web/mobile devices (plus GUV series of USB headsets/Webcams), zero-touch out-of-box automated NAT firewall traversal for remote users & devices, IT-friendly remote management of UCM and attached endpoint devices, and more.

The RemoteConnect can be configured under RemoteConnect tab on the web UI of the UCM.

On the GDMS platform, sign in and go to Device🡪PBX Device page, click on “Add Device” to add your UCM6300 device to the GDMS system, once done an open beta plan will be assigned to the UCM.

In daily operation, the user can click the “Diagnosis” button to diagnose the remote service system. The specific diagnosis content includes media service (STUN/TURN), GDMS link and heartbeat detection, tunnel service (SIP/Web Socket), Cloud IM, UCM bandwidth speed measurement.

Plan Settings

After UCM is added into GDMS, all SIP extensions on the UCM will be synced up to GDMS automatically for users to allocate and manage SIP extension for their end devices. Also, the media NAT Traversal service, alert event sync configuration items are checked by default, the CDR data cloud storage in GDMS should be manually checked according to user needs.

The UCM supports to allow authorized GDMS user to access UCM without entering the password once the super admin or admin checks “Enable Passwordless Remote Access”. If super admin enables this option, then the UCM will be accessed using the super admin account. If admin enables this option, then the UCM will be accessed using the admin account. Super admin and admin can see whether this option is enabled. Additionally, super admin can disable all accounts who enabled this option while admin can only disable access for the account itself.

The settings are under UCM web GUI: RemoteConnect🡪Plan Settings.

After adding UCM to the GDMS platform, UCM will synchronize all SIP extensions to the GDMS platform, this allows to use the GDMS platform for account allocation and terminal management.

The accounts synchronized to GDMS platform can be viewed on the GDMS-> VoIP Account->SIP Account page. As shown in the figure below:

The Media NAT Traversal provides a fully automatic intelligent external network penetration service to ensure that you can make normal calls/conferences on the external network.

CDR data cloud storage provides a service of dumping to GDMS to prevent CDR from continuously increasing occupying UCM storage space.

Alarm event synchronization is to synchronize the alarm information generated on UCM to the GDMS server.

UCM supports GDMS remote passwordless access. When this button is checked, GDMS remote access UCM does not need to enter the account password, and no login is required.

Allow the administrator/super administrator to open it. After clicking on open with an account, the subsequent password-free login will use the account. All administrators and super administrators can see whether this UCM is enabled.

Super administrators can check and uncheck all the exemption lists; administrators can check and uncheck the exemption status of this account, and the corresponding account exemption access function will be closed after cancellation.

Notes:

• Deleting an account on GDMS only removes the association between the account and the device, and does not delete the SIP account information on UCM.
• Any creation, deletion or modification of the SIP account on UCM will be automatically synchronized to the GDMS cloud platform.
• After checking the “Media NAT traversal service”, the TURN service and other related traversal settings set by the user will not take effect.

Integrated Customer Service

To configure the Integrated Customer Service, go to the Web GUI 🡪 RemoteConnect 🡪 Integrated Customer Service page that allows users to download the SDK provided by the customer service system and integrate it on the website, so that the website can contact customer service for call operations. The call queue is used as the customer service number.

Enabling Click2Call will allow users to initiate a direct call from the web browser by clicking on the call button embedded on the website graphical interface. The calls initiated can be directed to call queues or a specific extension.

Enterprise UI Customization

With a RemoteConnect plan, on the Web GUI 🡪 RemoteConnect 🡪 Enterprise UI Customization page, users can edit the company name and select a local image file as the new logo. The company name acts on the text part with the logo, and the pictures are in different formats and sizes according to the logo position, which are 64*64px (only ico format is supported), 256*256px, 80*80px, which supports users in the “UCM management platform/login” “”, “Reset Password”, “Email Template”, “Wave_PC”, “Wave Login”, “Browser Label”, “Guide Page” interface preview.

• LOGO 1: Replaces Browser tab icon
• LOGO 2: Replaces the Grandstream banner on the top left corner of the management login page and emails.
• LOGO 3: Replaces the Grandstream logo on the top left corner of the Wave Web interface and UCM management interface.

Statistics

After using UCM RemoteConnect, all remote calls will be logged and concurrent remote calls will be displayed on the UCM. The concurrent remote calls can be viewed under UCM web GUI🡪UCM RemoteConnect🡪Statistics page.

For more information, please visit http://ucmrc.gdms.cloud/intro.html and read our UCM63XX RemoteConnect guides

GDMS Cloud Storage Space

When the correspondent RemoteConnect plan is active, the user can access to a GDMS Cloud Storage Space to get an overview about how the storage space is being used. The data is represented in four categories of file types: CDR Data, Backup Data, Recording Files, and IM Files.

The user is also able to see the names of all the files stored in the GDMS Cloud Storage Space.

UCM6300’s WAVE

Wave is a mobile, desktop, and web App that provides remote voice and video collaboration tools for businesses utilizing Grandstream’s UCM6300 series IP PBXs. For more information, please visit: https://ucmrc.gdms.cloud/intro.html and read our UCM63XX RemoteConnect guides

For more details about the Wave Web, please refer to the following guides:

https://documentation.grandstream.com/knowledge-base/ucm630x-series-wave-web-administration-guide/ https://documentation.grandstream.com/knowledge-base/wave-web-user-guide/

Grandstream Wave is also available in Android/IOS version where it can be downloaded from Google Play or AppStore. For more details, please refer to the following guide:

https://documentation.grandstream.com/knowledge-base/wave-mobile-application-android-ios-user-guide/

Wave Desktop version is also supported in Windows and MacOS and can be downloaded from: https://fw.gdms.cloud/wave/download/

API CONFIGURATION

The UCM630X supports third party billing interface API for external billing software to access CDR and call recordings on the PBX. The API uses HTTPS to request the CDR data and call recording data matching given parameters as configured on the third-party application.

API Configuration Parameters

Before accessing the API, the administrators need enable API and configure the access/authentication information on the UCM630X first under Integrations🡪API Configuration. The API configuration parameters are listed in the tables below.

HTTPS API Settings (Old)
Basic Settings
Enable	Enable/Disable API. The default setting is disabled.
TLS Bind Address	Configure the IP address for TLS server to bind to. “0.0.0.0” means binding to all interfaces. The port number is optional, and the default port number is 8443. The IP address must match the common name (host name) in the certificate so that the TLS socket will not bind to multiple IP addresses. The default setting is 0.0.0.0:8443.
Username	Configure the username for TLS authentication.
Password	Configure the password for TLS authentication.
Permitted IP(s)	Specify a list of IP addresses permitted to use the API. This creates an API-specific access control list. Multiple entries are allowed. For example, “192.168.40.3/255.255.255.255” denies access from all IP addresses except 192.168.40.3. By default, this is blank, which indicates that no IP addresses are allowed to use this API.
Other Settings
TLS Private Key	Upload TLS private key. The size of the key file must be under 2MB. This file will be renamed as ‘private.pem’ automatically.
TLS Cert	Upload TLS cert. The size of the certificate must be under 2MB. This is the certificate file (*.pem format only) for TLS connection. This file will be renamed as “certificate.pem” automatically. It contains private key for the client and signed certificate for the server.
API Module
CDR API	Enable/disable CDR API module.
REC API	Enable/disable REC API module.
PMS API	Enable/disable PMS API module.

For more details on CDR API (Access to Call Detail Records), REC API (Access to Call Recording Files) and PMS API, please refer the document in the link here:

• https://documentation.grandstream.com/knowledge-base/cdr-rec-api/
• https://documentation.grandstream.com/knowledge-base/cdr-rec-api/
• PMS API

API Queries Supported

The new API supports now new queries listed below which will accomplish certain requests and get data about different modules on UCM630X.

Queries Supported

getSystemStatus

getSystemGeneralStatus

listAccount

getSIPAccount

updateSIPAccount

listVoIPTrunk

addSIPTrunk

getSIPTrunk

updateSIPTrunk

deleteSIPTrunk

listOutboundRoute

addOutboundRoute

getOutboundRoute

updateOutboundRoute

deleteOutboundRoute

listInboundRoute

addInboundRoute

getInboundRoute

updateInboundRoute

deleteInboundRoute

playPromptByOrg

listBridgedChannels

listUnBridgedChannels

Hangup

callbarge

listQueue

getQueue

updateQueue

addQueue

deleteQueue

loginLogoffQueueAgent

pauseUnpauseQueueAgent

listPaginggroup

addPaginggroup

getPaginggroup

updatePaginggroup

deletePaginggroup

MulticastPaging

MulticastPagingHangup

listIVR

addIVR

getIVR

updateIVR

deleteIVR

cdrapi

recapi

pmsapi

queueapiget

getPinSets

addPinSets

updatePinSets

deletePinSets

cleanTerminalChatInformation

getSIPAccountQR

getCallQueuesMemberMessage

getQueueCalling

CDR Real-time Output Settings
Enable	Enables real-time CDR output module. This module connects to selected IP addresses and ports and posts CDR strings as soon as it is available.
Server Address	CDR server IP address
Port	CDR server IP port
Upload Prompts User Configuration
Username	Username used to upload prompts.
Password	Password used to upload prompts.

Upload Voice Prompt via API

Customers now can use the “Upload Prompts User Configuration” to upload/replace voice prompt files as an alternative method to the manual upload method on UCM PBX Settings🡪 Voice Prompt🡪 Custom Prompt.

The workflow of the prompt file upload goes as:

An HTTP/HTTPS request is sent to the UCM to upload/replace a voice prompt file, the request should include authentication details to the UCM and the name of the file to be uploaded. Then the UCM will contact an FTP server that should be hosted on the same IP address of the HTTP/HTTPS requester and download the prompt file from the FTP server.
The steps and conditions to upload the voice prompt via API are listed below:

1. Configure the prompt User under Integrations 🡪 API Configuration 🡪 Upload Prompts User Configuration. By default, the username and password for voice prompt user are “Username: uploader; Password: uploader123”.

2. Hash the password of the user configured to an MD5 Encryption format.
3. Set the permission on the FTP server to Anonymous on the local computer hosting the FTP server and make sure that the default FTP port 21 is used.
4. Send an HTTP/HTTPS command to trigger the Prompt file upload on the UCM. If UCM’s HTTP server is set to HTTPS, the example of the request sent to the UCM is:

https://192.168.124.89:8089/cgi?action=uploadprompt&username=uploader&password=9191a6394c21b3aabd779213c7179462&filename=test.mp3

If UCM’s HTTP server is set to HTTP, the example of the request sent to the UCM is：

https://192.168.124.89:8089/cgi?action=uploadprompt&username=uploader&password=9191a6394c21b3aabd779213c7179462&filename=test.mp3

For more details on CDR API (Access to Call Detail Records) and REC API (Access to Call Recording Files), please refer the document in the link here:

https://documentation.grandstream.com/knowledge-base/cdr-rec-api/

CTI SERVER

UCM does support CTI server capabilities which are designed to be a part of the CTI solution suite provided by Grandstream, including GXP21XX and GXP17XX enterprise IP phones along with GS Affinity app.

Mainly the UCM will by default listening on port TCP 8888 for the connections from GS affinity application in order to interact, modify and serve data requests by the application which includes setting call features for the connected extension as call forward and DND.

Users can change the listening port under the menu page, Web GUI🡪Integrations🡪CTI Server as shown on below screenshot:

More information about GS affinity and CTI Support on Grandstream products series please refer to the following link:

https://documentation.grandstream.com/knowledge-base/gs-affinity-user-guide/

ASTERISK MANAGER INTERFACE (RESTRICTED ACCESS)

The UCM630X supports Asterisk Manager Interface (AMI) with restricted access. AMI allows a client program to connect to an Asterisk instance commands or read events over a TCP/IP stream. It is particularly useful when the system admin tries to track the state of a telephony client inside Asterisk.

User could configure AMI parameters on UCM630X Web GUI🡪Integrations🡪AMI. For details on how to use AMI on UCM630X, please refer to the following AMI guide:

https://documentation.grandstream.com/knowledge-base/ami-asterisk-management-interface/

CRM INTEGRATION

Customer relationship management (CRM) is a term that refers to practices, strategies and technologies that companies use to manage and analyze customer interactions and data throughout the customer lifecycle, with the goal of improving business relationships with customers.

The UCM630X support the following CRMs: SugarCRM, VtigerCRM, Salesforce CRM and ACT! CRM, which allows users to look for contact information in the Contacts, Leads and / or Accounts tables, shows the contact record in CRM page, and saves the call information in the contact’s history.

Sugar CRM

Configuration page of the SugarCRM can be accessed via admin login, on the UCM WebGUI > Integrations > CRM.

1. Select “SugarCRM” from the CRM System Dropdown in order to use SugarCRM.

CRM System	Select a CRM system from the dropdown menu.
CRM Server Address	Enter the IP address of the CRM server.
Add Unknown Number	Add the new number to this module if it cannot be found in the selected module.
Contact Lookups	Select from the “Available” list of lookups and press to select where the UCM can perform the lookups on the CRM tables, Leads, Accounts, and Contacts.

Once settings on admin access are configured:

2. Click on and .
3. Logout from admin access.
4. Login to the UCM as user and navigate under “User Portal🡪Other Feature🡪CRM User Settings”.

Click on “Enable CRM” and enter the username/password associated with the CRM account then click on and . The status will change from “Logged Out” to “Logged In”. User can start then using SugarCRM features.

Vtiger CRM

Configuration page of the VtigerCRM can be accessed via admin login, on the UCM WebGUI🡪Integrations🡪CRM.

1. Select “Vtiger CRM” from the CRM System Dropdown in order to use Vtiger CRM.

CRM System	Select a CRM system from the dropdown menu.
CRM Server Address	Enter the IP address of the CRM server.
Add Unknown Number	Add the new number to this module if it cannot be found in the selected module.
Contact Lookups	Select from the “Available” list of lookups and press to select where the UCM can perform the lookups on the CRM tables, Leads, Organizations, and Contacts.

Once settings on admin access are configured:

2. Click on and .
3. Logout from admin access.
4. Login to the UCM as user and navigate under “User Portal🡪Other Features🡪CRM User Settings”.

Click on “Enable CRM” and enter the username/password associated with the CRM account then click on and . The status will change from “Logged Out” to “Logged In”. User can start then using SugarCRM features.

Salesforce CRM

Configuration page of the Salesforce CRM can be accessed via admin login, on the UCM Web GUI🡪Integrations🡪CRM”.

1. Select “Salesforce” from the CRM System Dropdown in order to use Salesforce CRM.

CRM System	Select a CRM system from the dropdown menu, four CRM systems are available: SugarCRM, VtigerCRM, Salesforce and ACT! CRM.
Add Unknown Number	Add the new number to this module if it cannot be found in the selected module.
Contact Lookups	Select from the “Available” list of lookups and press to select where the UCM can perform the lookups on the CRM tables, Leads, Accounts, and Contacts.

Once settings on admin access are configured:

2. Click on and .
3. Logout from admin access.
4. Login to the UCM as user and navigate under “User Portal🡪Other Features🡪CRM User Settings”.

Click on “Enable CRM” and enter the username, password and Security Token associated with the CRM account then click on and . The status will change from “Logged Out” to “Logged In”. User can start then using Salesforce CRM features.

ACT! CRM

Configuration page of the ACT! CRM can be accessed via admin login, on the UCM Web GUI🡪Integrations🡪CRM”.

The configuration steps of the ACT! CRM are as follows:

1. Navigate to Integrations🡪CRM and select the “ACT! CRM” option.

2. Log into the UCM as a regular user and navigate to Integrations🡪CRM User Settings and check “Enable CRM” option and enter the username and password, which will be the ACT! CRM account’s API Key and Developer Key, respectively. To obtain these, please refer to the ACT! CRM API developer’s guide here: https://mycloud.act.com/act/Help

PMS INTEGRATION

UCM630X supports Hotel Property Management System PMS, including check-in/check-out services, wakeup calls, room status, Do Not Disturb which provide an ease of management for hotel applications. This feature can be found on Web GUI🡪Integrations🡪PMS.

The PMS module built-in the UCM supports the following features based on each solution:

Feature	Mitel	HMobile	HSC	IDS
Check-In	✓	✓	✗	✓
Check-out	✓	✓	✗	✓
Wake-up Call	✓	✓	✗	✓
Name Change	✓	✗	✓	✗
Update	✗	✓	✗	✓
Set Credit	✓	✗	✗	✗
Set Station Restriction	✓	✗	✓	✗
Room Status	✗	✓	✗	✓
Room Move	✗	✓	✗	✓
Do Not Disturb	✗	✓	✓	✗
Mini Bar	✗	✓	✗	✓
MSG	✗	✓	✗	✗
MWI	✗	✗	✓	✗
Unconditional Call Forward	✗	✗	✓	✗

HMobile PMS Connector

In this mode, the system can be divided into three parts:

• PMS (Property Management System)
• PMSI (Property Management System Interface)
• PBX

Grandstream UCM6XXX series have integrated HMobile Connect PMSI which supports a large variety of PMS software providing following hospitality features: Check-in, Check-out, set Room Status, Wake-up call and more.

The following figure illustrates the communication flow between the UCM and PMS software, which is done through a middleware system (HMobile Connect) acting as interface between both parties.

HSC PMS

In this mode, the system can be divided into two parts:

• PMS (Property Management System)
• PBX

Grandstream UCM6XXX series have integrated HSC PMS providing following features:

• Changing Display Name
• Set Station Restriction
• Call forwarding
• DND
• Name Change
• MWI

Note:

1. Added support for receiving HTTP GET keep-alive messages from HSC PMS. This will allow the PMS to be aware of its connection to the UCM and take the appropriate actions such as raising alarms, sending notifications, etc.
2. Added support for HTTP GET requests from HSC PMS to retrieve UCM extension information. UCM can provide the following information:

• extension – UCM extension number
• name – extension display name / CID name
• mwi – MWI state
• permission – permission level of the extension
• cfwt – call forwarding always number
• dnd – DND state
• language – display language of the extension in ISO 639-1 format

The UCM should respond with either 200 OK or 404 responses.

1. Added HTTPS support

The following figure illustrates the communication flow between the PBX (Grandstream UCM6xxx Series) and PMS software (HSC). The communication between both parties is direct with no middleware.

Mitel PMS

In this mode, the system can be divided into two parts:

• PMS (Property Management System)
• PBX

Grandstream UCM6XXX series have integrated Mitel PMS providing following hospitality features: Check-in, Check-out, set Room Status, Wake-up call and more.

The following figure illustrates the communication flow between the PBX (Grandstream UCM6xxx Series) and PMS software (Mitel). The communication between both parties is direct with no middleware.

IDS PMS

In this mode, the system can be divided into two parts:

• PMS (Property Management System)
• PBX

The Grandstream UCM series integrates IDS PMS to set room status, Mini Bar, wake up calls, activate/deactivate dialing permissions, and more.

PMS API

The PMS API allows users to use their own middleware to work with PMS systems instead of currently supported integrations.

Additionally, this API allows access to read and modify certain UCM parameters that current supported PMS integrations cannot. To use this, users must first enable and configure the HTTPS API settings.

For more details, please refer to online https://documentation.grandstream.com/knowledge-base/https-api/, Pmsapi section.

Connecting to PMS

On the UCM WebGUI🡪Integrations🡪PMS🡪Basic Settings” set the connection information for the PMS platform.

In order to use some PMS features please activate the feature code associated under “Call Features🡪Feature Codes”

• Update PMS Room Status
• PMS Wake Up Service

PMS Features

Room Management

In Room Management tab, the user can create a room and affect up to two extensions to it. This will appear in Room Status tab, and from there the user can change the Check-in/Check-out

Call Privileges allows the administrator to set the level of call privilege of the room.

Room Status

After clicking “OK” the client entry will be added to the list.

The user can click on Check-in/Check-out Records to view the history of the checked-in and checked-out guests.

Custom Room Status Codes

The user can customize the existing room statuses or add more statuses along with the corresponding name. The user can customize the status code to up to 16-digit code. To customize room status, please click on .

Call Rate

In Call Rate page, the user can create different call rates for different call types. For example, the user can create a call rate which applies to national calls. The call rates can be differentiated by the prefix set for each call rate, the prefix corresponds to an outbound route pattern which allows national calls. Thus, the call rate applies accordingly.

Wake Up Service

In order to create a New Wake up service, user can click on ”Add”, the following window will pop up:

Field	Description
Room Number	Select the room number where to call with a limitation of 63 characters.
Select Time	Set the time of the wakeup call
Action Status	Show the status of the call: Programmed: the call is scheduled for the time set Cancelled: the call is canceled Executed: the wakeup call is made Note: Editing an already executed wakeup service will automatically change the service’s status to “Programmed”.
Type	Single: The call will be made once on the specific time. Daily: The call will be repeated every day on the specific time

Once the call is made on the time specified, the following figure show the status of the wakeup call.

This call has been executed but has been rejected, that why we can see the “Busy” status.

Housekeeper

In order to create a new housekeeper, click on under UCM WebGUI🡪Integrations🡪PMS🡪Housekeeper.

Housekeeper Code	Enter the Code to use when the houskeeper wants to change the status of the room.
Password	Enter the password associated with the housekeeper.

Local PMS

UCM6300 series offer a local Property Management System to give the user basic management features without having to purchase a PMS for the most basic property management actions. In addition to Room Management, Rooms Status for checking-in and checking-out, Wakeup Service, and Housekeeper functions, the UCM6300 allows a number of additional functions upon checking-out, like backing up voicemail recordings, clearing wakeup calls and Wave history automatically, in addition to resetting Wave’s password. The user can use the Local PMS feature to check-in and check-out clients from the web user interface.

Wakeup Service

The Wake Up service can be used to schedule a reminder or wake up calls to any valid destination. This service is available on the UCM630X as a separated module.

There are three ways to set up Wakeup Service:

• Using admin login
• Using user portal
• Using feature code

Wake Up Service using Admin Login

1. Login to the UCM as admin.
2. Wake Up service can be found under Web GUI🡪Integrations🡪Wakeup Service, click on ”Add” to create a new wakeup service. The following window will pop up.

3. Fill out the required fields and select the members to add to the wakeup group.

Enable Wakeup Service	Enable Wakeup service.
Name	Enter a name (up to 64 characters) to identify the wakeup service.
Prompt	Select the prompt to play for that extension.
Custom Date	If disabled, users can select a specific date and time. If enabled users can select multiple days of the week to perform the wakeup.
Date	Select the date or dates when to performs the wakeup call.
Time	Select the time when to play the wakeup call.
Members	Select the members involved within the wakeup service group.

4. Click and to apply the changes.

A wakeup service entry is created. The UCM will send a wakeup call to every extension in the member list at the scheduled date and time.

UCM Model	Max members in a Wakeup Service
UCM6301	50
UCM6302	100
UCM6304	150
UCM6308	200

Wake Up Service from User Portal

1. Login to the user portal on the UCM630X.
2. Wake Up service can be found under “Integrations🡪Wakeup Service”, click on ”Add” to create a new wakeup service.
3. Configures the Name, Prompt, Date and Time for the user to make the wakeup to.
4. Click and to apply the changes.

Wake Up Service Feature Code

1. Login to the UCM as admin.
2. Enable “Wakeup Service” from the Web GUI under “Call Features🡪Feature Codes”.

3. Click and to apply the changes.
4. Dial “*36” which is the feature code by default to access to the UCM wakeup service to add, update, activate or deactivate UCM wakeup service.

Mini Bar

The mini bar feature is used to track the goods which have been consumed by the guests during their stay. This feature allows to add the consumed goods to the bill by the housekeeper.

ANNOUNCEMENT CENTER

The UCM630X supports Announcement Center feature which allows users to pre-record and store voice message into UCM630X with a specified code. The users can also create group with specified extensions. When the code and the group number are dialed together in the combination of code + group number, the specified voice message is sent to all group members and only extensions in the group will hear the voice message.

Announcement Center Settings

Group Settings

Announcement Center feature can be found under Web GUI🡪Integrations🡪Announcement Center. The following example demonstrates the usage of this feature.

1. Click to add new group.
2. Give a name to the newly created group.
3. Create a group number which is used with code to send voice message.
4. Select the extensions to be included in the group, who will receive the voice message.

In this example, group “Test” has number 666. Extension 1000, 1001 and 1002 are in this group.

5. Click to create a new Announcement Center.
6. Give a name to the newly created Announcement Center.
7. Specify the code which will be used with group number to send the voice message to.
8. Select the message that will be used by the code from the Custom Prompt drop down menu. To create a new Prompt, please click “Prompt” link and follow the instructions in that page.

Code and Group number are used together to direct specified message to the target group. All extensions in the group will receive the message. For example, we can send code 55 to group 666 by dialing 55666 from any extension registered to the UCM630X. All the members in group 666 which are extension 1000, 1001 and 1002 will receive this voice message after they pick up the call.

QUEUEMETRICS

The QueueMetrics docking tool provides an interface for UCM system and QM docking. Pass the UCM call queue report to QueueMetrics in a richer form. QueueMetrics is a call center control platform that supports login and logout of frequently used agents in the call center, provides call reports, real-time queue monitoring and other functions.

STATUS AND REPORTING

PBX Status

The UCM630X monitors the status for Trunks, Extensions, Queues, Conference Rooms, Interfaces, Storage Device Life (eMMC lifetime), the number of public/random video meeting and Parking lot. It presents administrators the real-time status in different sections under Web GUI🡪System Status🡪Dashboard.

Trunks

Users could see all the configured trunk status in this section.

Extensions

Extensions Status can be seen from the same configuration page, users can go under Web GUI🡪Extension/Trunk🡪Extensions and following page will be displayed listing the extensions and their status information.

Status	Display extension number (including feature code). The color indicator has the following definitions. Green: Free Blue: Ringing Yellow: In Use Grey: Unavailable
Presence Status	Display the presence status of the extension.
Extension	Display the extension number.
Name	First name and last name of the extension.
IP and Port	Display the IP and port number of the registered device.
Email	Display Email Notification status for the extension. When notification is waiting for be sent, shows and once sent it will display
Terminal Type	Displays extension type. SIP User IAX User Analog User Ring Groups Voicemail Groups

Interfaces Status

This section displays interface/port connection status on the UCM630X. The following example shows the interface status for UCM6304 with USB, WAN port, FXS1, FXS2 and FXO1 connected.

	USB connected.
	USB disconnected.
	SD Card connected.
	SD Card disconnected.
	LAN/WAN connected.
	LAN/WAN not configured.
	LAN/WAN disconnected.
	FXS/FXO connected.
	FXS/FXO waiting.
	FXS/FXO busy.
	FXS/FXO not configured.
	FXS/FXO disconnected.

System Status

The UCM630X system status can be accessed via Web GUI🡪Status🡪System Status, which displays the following system information.

General

Under Web GUI🡪System Status🡪System Information🡪General, users could check the hardware and software information for the UCM630X. Please see details in the following table.

System Status 🡪System Information🡪General
Model	Product model.
Part Number	Product part number.
System Time	Current system time. The current system time is also available on the upper right of each web page.
Up Time	System up time since the last reboot.
Boot	Boot version.
Core	Core version.
Base	Base version.
Program	Program version. This is the main software release version.
Recovery	Recovery version.
Lang	Lang version
Wave	Wave version

Network

Under Web GUI🡪System Status🡪System Information🡪Network, users could check the network information for the UCM630X. Please see details in the following table.

System Status🡪System Status🡪Network
MAC Address	Global unique ID of device, in HEX format. The MAC address can be found on the label coming with original box and on the label located on the bottom of the device.
IPv4 Address	IPv4 address.
IPv6 Address Link	IPv6 address
Gateway	Default gateway address.
Subnet Mask	Subnet mask address.
DNS Server	DNS Server address.
Duplex Mode	Duplex Mode
Speed	Speed

Remark

The UCM admin could add remark on UCM web UI->System Status->System Information->Remark to log any necessary information for the UCM such as location, technical contacts, important topology information and etc. This could be useful for UCM admin especially when there are multiple UCMs to be managed.

If this UCM has UCMRC service, the remark will also be sync up to GDMS. If this information is edited on GDMS, it will also be updated to the UCM web UI.

Storage Usage

Users could access the storage usage information from Web GUI🡪System Status🡪Dashboard🡪Storage Usage. It shows the available and used space for Space Usage and Inode Usage.

Space Usage includes:

• Configuration partition

This partition contains PBX system configuration files and service configuration files.

• Data partition

Voicemail, recording files, IVR file, Music on Hold files etc.

• USB disk

USB disk will display if connected.

• SD Card

SD Card will display if connected.

Inode Usage includes:

• Configuration partition
• Data partition

Note:

Inode is the pointer used for file reference in the system. The system usually has limited resources of pointers

Resource Usage

When configuring and managing the UCM630X, users could access resource usage information to estimate the current usage and allocate the resources accordingly. Under Web GUI 🡪 System Status 🡪 Dashboard 🡪 Resource Usage, the current CPU usage and Memory usage are shown in the pie chart.

System Events

The UCM630X can monitor important system events, log the alerts, and send Email notifications to the system administrator.

Alert Events List

The system alert events list can be found under Web GUI 🡪 Maintenance 🡪 System Events. The following event and their actions are currently supported on the UCM630X which will have alert and/or Email generated if occurred:

Click on to configure the parameters for each event. See examples below.

1. Fail2ban blocking: If the system Fail2ban is blocking, the event will be recorded in the alert log.
2. Flood Attacks: An alert will be generated in case a DDoS attack attempt is detected by the UCM. The event will be registered in the alert log and it will be pushed to the GDMS.
3. Network Traffic Storm: An alert will be generated in case there is an excessive amount of packets on the LAN. Network Traffic Storms consume the resources of the network components and saturate the bandwidth, which will bring the whole network to a halt. This event will be registered in events log and a notification will be pushed to the GDMS.
4. User login banned: If user login is blocked, the event will be recorded in the alert log.
5. Remote Login: An alert will be generated upon a remote login.
6. System Crash:

• Detect Cycle: The UCM will detect the event at each cycle based on the specified time. Users can enter the number and then select second(s)/minute(s)/hour(s)/day(s) to configure the cycle.

Click on the switch to turn on/off the alert and Email notification for the event. Users could also select the checkbox for each event and then click on button “Alert On”, “Alert Off”, “Email Notification On”, “Email Notification Off” to control the alert and Email notification configuration.

7. Restore Config: Once the system configuration is restored, the configuration restoration event will be recorded in the alert log.

8. System Update: Once the system is upgraded, the system upgrade event will be recorded in the alarm log.

9. System Reboot: UCM will detect the system restart and will send an alert for it. There are two kinds of reboots that the UCM detects, normal and abnormal reboots. Normal reboots are the reboots that are done when you press the restart button on the web UI, reboot that occur after updating the firmware, HA backup reboot etc… Abnormal reboots are the reboots that occur due to a system failure. Normal reboots are registered in the alert log and they are not pushed to GDMS, while abnormal reboots are registered in the alert list and are pushed to GDMS.

10. TLS Cert Expiration: Starting 7 days before the HTTP Server TLS certificate in the UCM device expires, an expiration countdown notification is sent every day; the certificate has expired, an expiration notification is sent; after the alarm notification is generated, a valid new certificate is uploaded, and a notification to restore the TLS certificate is generated.

11. HA failure warning: After the HA dual-system hot backup disaster recovery function is enabled in the UCM device, the HA fault alarm is automatically turned on. When the device has a software and hardware related fault, an HA fault alarm is generated.

12. Cloud IM Abnormal: An alert message will be generated f the Cloud IM encounter any issue or exhibit any abnormal behavior.

13. Modify Super Admin Password: Once the super administrator password is modified, the system will record the password modification event in the alarm log.

14. NAS: If the system network disk is abnormal, the event will be recorded in the alarm log.

15. Disk Usage

• Detect Cycle: The UCM630X will perform the internal disk usage detection based on this cycle. Users can enter the number and then select second(s)/minute(s)/hour(s)/day(s) to configure the cycle.
• Alert Threshold: If the detected value exceeds the threshold (in percentage), the UCM630X system will send the alert.

16. Memory Usage

• Alert Threshold: If the detected value exceeds the threshold (in percentage), the UCM630X system will send the alert.

17. External Disk Usage

• Detect Cycle: The UCM630X will perform the External disk usage detection based on this cycle. Users can enter the number and then select second(s)/minute(s)/hour(s)/day(s) to configure the cycle.
• Alert Threshold: If the detected value exceeds the threshold (in percentage), the UCM630X system will send the alert.

18. External disk status: If the external disk of the system is Connected/Disconnected, the event will be recorded in the alarm log.

19. CPU Usage Call Control: The CPU flow control threshold is defined under System Settings 🡪 General Settings, and the default value is 90%. When the traffic exceeds the predetermined value, the event will be recorded in the alert log and new calls will be prohibited.

20. Emergency Calls: If the system generates an emergency call, the event will be recorded in the alert log.

21. Register SIP trunk failed

• Detect Cycle: The UCM will detect the failure of SIP trunk registration at a set interval. Users can enter the number and then select second(s)/minute(s)/hour(s)/day(s) to configure the cycle.

22. SIP peer trunk status: If the SIP peer trunks status is abnormal, the event will be recorded in the alert log.

23. SIP Outgoing Call through Trunk Failure: If the system SIP trunk outgoing call fails, the event will be recorded in the alert log.

24. Register SIP failed

Configure the sending period of the SIP registration failure alert. The first registration failure alert of the same IP to the same SIP account will be sent immediately, and then no alerts will be sent for similar failure warnings in the cycle time. After the cycle time expires, an alert will be sent again to count the number of occurrences of similar SIP registration failure alerts during the cycle. When set to 0, alerts are always sent immediately.

25. SIP lost registration: If System SIP extension registration is lost, the event will be recorded in the alert log.

26. SIP Internal Call Failure: If the system SIP extension call fails within the office, the event will be recorded in the alert log.

27. High Frequency Outgoing Call: When an extension initiates calls frequently, an alert will be logged in the alert log and a notification will be pushed to the GDMS and through email as well.

28. Remote concurrent calls: If the remote concurrent call fails, the event will be recorded in the alert log.

29. Trunk Outbound Call Duration Usage:

30. Trunk Concurrent calls: When the system detects that the number of concurrent calls of a certain relay exceeds the threshold set by the relay within a certain period of time, the event will be recorded in the alarm log. Calls are not restricted if the threshold is exceeded.

31. User login success: Successful user login events will be recorded in the alert log.

32. User login failed: User login failure events will be recorded in the alert log.

33. Data Sync Backup: If the system performs data synchronization and backup abnormalities, the event will be recorded in the alert log.

Alert Log

Under Web GUI🡪Maintenance🡪System Events🡪Alert Log, system messages from triggered system events are listed as alert logs. The following screenshot shows system crash alert logs.

User could also filter alert logs by selecting a certain event category, type of alert log, and/or specifying a certain time period. The matching results will be displayed after clicking on . Alert logs are classified into two types by the system:

1. Generate Alert: Generated when alert events happen, for example, alert logs for disk usage exceeding the alert threshold.
2. Restore to Normal: Generated when alert events being cleared, for example, logs for disk usage dropping back below the alert threshold.

User could filter out alert logs of “Generate Alert” or “Restore to Normal” by specifying the type according to need. The following figure shows an example of filtering out alert logs of type of “Restore to Normal”.

Alert Contact

This feature allows the administrator to be notified when one of the Alert events mentioned above happens. Users could add administrator’s Email address under Web GUI🡪Maintenance🡪System Events🡪Alert Contact to send the alert notification to an email (Up to 10 Email addresses can be added) or also specify an HTTP server where to send this alert.

Super Admin Email	Configure the email addresses to send alert notifications to. Up to 10 email addresses can be added.
Admin Email	Configure the email addresses to send alert notifications to. Up to 10 email addresses can be added.
Email Template	Please refer to section [Email Templates]
Protocol	Protocol used to communicate with the server. HTTP or HTTPS. Default one is HTTP.
HTTP Server	The IP address or FQDN of the HTTP/HTTPS server.
HTTP Server Port	HTTP/HTTPS port
Warning Template	Customize the template used for system warnings. By default: {“action”:”${ACTION}”,”mac”:”${MAC}”,”content”:”${WARNING_MSG}”}
Notification Template	Customize the notification template to receive relevant alert information. By default: {“action”:”${ACTION}”,”cpu”:”${CPU_USED}”,”memery”:”${MEM_USED}”,”disk”:”${DISK_USED}”,”external_disk”:”${EXTERNAL_DISK_USED}”} Note: The notification message with “action:0” will be sent periodically if Notification Interval is set.
Notification Interval	Modifies the frequency at which notifications are sent in seconds. No notifications will be sent if the value is “0”. Default value: 20
Template Variables	${MAC} : MAC Address ${WARNING_MSG} : Warning message ${TIME} : Current System Time ${CPU_USED} : CPU Usage ${MEM_USED} : Memory Usage ${ACTION} : Message Type. Refer to [Alert Events] ${DISK_USED} : Disk Usage ${EXTERNAL_DISK_USED} : Disk Usage

CDR

CDR (Call Detail Record) is a data record generated by the PBX that contains attributes specific to a single instance of phone call handled by the PBX. It has several data fields to provide detailed description for the call, such as phone number of the calling party, phone number of the receiving party, start time, call duration, etc.
On the UCM630X, the CDR can be accessed under Web GUI🡪CDR🡪CDR. Users could filter the call report by specifying the date range and criteria, depending on how the users would like to include the logs to the report. Click on “Filter” button to display the generated report.

Call Type	Groups the following: Inbound calls: Inbound calls are calls originated from a non-internal source (like a VoIP trunk) and sent to an internal extension. Outbound calls: Outbound calls are calls sent to a non-internal source (like a VoIP trunk) from an internal extension. Internal calls: Internal calls are calls from one internal extension to another extension, which are not sent over a trunk. External calls: External calls are calls sent from one trunk to another trunk, which are not sent to any internal extension.
Status	Filter with the call status, the available statuses are the following: Answered No Answer Busy Failed
Source Trunk Name	Select source trunk(s) and the CDR of calls going through inbound the trunk(s) will be filtered out.
Destination Trunk Name	Select destination trunk(s) and the CDR of calls going outbound through the trunk(s) will be filtered out.
Action Type	Filter calls using the Action Type, the following actions are available: Announce Announcement page Dial Announcements Callback Call Forward Conference DISA Follow Me IVR Page Parked Call Queue Ring Group Transfer VM VMG Video Conference VQ_Callback Wakeup Emergency Call Emergency Notify SCA
Extension Group	Specify the Extension Group name to filter with.
Export File Data	Select the fields that will be exported, the following fields are available: Account Code Session Premier caller Action type Source trunk name Destination trunk name Caller number Caller ID Caller name Callee number Answer by Context Start time Answer time End time Call time Talk time Source channel Dest channel Call status Dest channel extension Last app Last data AMAFLAGS UIQUEID Call type NAT
Account Code	Select the account Code to filter with. If pin group CDR is enabled, the call with pin group information will be displayed as part of the CDR under Account Code Field.
Start Time	Specify the start time to filter the CDR report. Click on the calendar icon on the right and the calendar will show for users to select the exact date and time.
End Time	Specify the end time to filter the CDR report. Click on the calendar icon on the right and the calendar will show for users to select the exact date and time.
Caller Number	Enter the caller number to filter the CDR report. CDR with the matching caller number will be filtered out. User could specify a particular caller number or enter a pattern. ‘.’ matches zero or more characters, only appears in the end. ‘X’ matches any digit from 0 to 9, case-insensitive, repeatable, only appears in the end. For example: 3XXX: It will filter out CDR that having caller number with leading digit 3 and of 4 digits’ length. 3.: It will filter out CDR that having caller number with leading digit 3 and of any length.
Caller Name	Enter the caller name to filter the CDR report. CDR with the matching caller name will be filtered out.
Callee Number	Enter the callee number to filter the CDR report. CDR with the matching callee number will be filtered out. Note: The “Callee Number” filter field supports specifying Pattern (example: 3XXX) or using Leading digits (example: 3.) as filtering options.

The call report will display as the following figure shows.

The CDR report has the following data fields:

• Start Time

Format: 2019-12-11 09:53:03

• Action Type

Example:

IVR

DIAL

WAKEUP

• Call From

Example format: 5555

• Call To

Example format: 1000

• Call Time

Format: 0:00:11

• Talk Time

Format: 0:00:06

• Account Code

Example format:

Grandstream/Test

• Status

Answered, Busy, No answer or Failed.

Users could perform the following operations on the call report.

• Sort by “Start Time”

Click on the header of the column to sort the report by “Start Time”. Clicking on “Start Time” again will reverse the order.

• Download Searched Results

Click on “Download Search Result(s)” to export the records filtered out to a .csv file.

• Download All Records

Click on “Download All Records” to export all the records to a .csv file.

• Delete All

Click on button to remove all the call report information.

• Delete Search Result

On the bottom of the page, click on button to remove CDR records that

appear on search results.

Note: When deleting CDR, a prompt will now appear asking whether to delete all recording files or not.

• Play/Download/Delete Recording File (per entry)

If the entry has audio recording file for the call, the three icons on the rightest column will be activated for users to select. In the following picture, the second entry has audio recording file for the call.

Click on to play the recording file; click on to download the recording file in .wav format; click on to delete the recording file (the call record entry will not be deleted).

• Automatic Download CDR Records

User could configure the UCM630X to automatically download the CDR records and send the records to multiple Email recipients in a specific hour. Click on “Automatic Download Settings” and configure the parameters in the dialog below.

To receive CDR record automatically from Email, check “Enable” and select a time period “By Day” “By Week” or “By Month”, select Hour of the day as well for the automatic download period. Make sure you have entered an Email or multiple email addresses where to receive the CDR records.

Starting from UCM630X firmware 1.0.10.x, transferred call will no longer be displayed as a separate call entry in CDR. It will display within call record in the same entry. CDR new features can be found under Web GUI🡪CDR🡪CDR. The user can click on the option icon for a specific call log entry to view details about this entry, such as premier caller and transferred call information.

Downloaded CDR File

The downloaded CDR (.csv file) has different format from the Web GUI CDR. Here are some descriptions.

• Caller number, Callee number

“Caller number”: the caller ID.

“Callee number”: the callee ID.

If the “Source Channel” contains “DAHDI”, this means the call is from FXO/PSTN line.

• Context

There are different context values that might show up in the downloaded CDR file. The actual value can vary case by case. Here are some sample values and their descriptions.

from-internal: internal extension makes outbound calls.

ext-did-XXXXX: inbound calls. It starts with “ext-did”, and “XXXXX” content varies case by case, which also relate to the order when the trunk is created.

ext-local: internal calls between local extensions.

• Source Channel, Dest Channel

Sample 1:

DAHDI means it is an analog call, FXO or FXS.

For UCM6302, DAHDI/(1-2) are FXO ports, and DAHDI(3-4) are FXS ports.

For UCM6304, DAHDI/(1-4) are FXO ports, and DAHDI(5-6) are FXS ports.

For UCM6308, DAHDI/(1-8) are FXO ports, and DAHDI(9-10) are FXS ports.

Sample 2:

“SIP” means it is a SIP call. There are three format:

(a) PJSIP/NUM-XXXXXX, where NUM is the local SIP extension number. The last XXXXX is a random string and can be ignored.

(c) PJSIP/trunk_X/NUM, where trunk_X is the internal trunk name, and NUM is the number to dial out through the trunk.

(c) PJSIP/trunk_X-XXXXXX, where trunk_X is the internal trunk name and it is an inbound call from this trunk. The last XXXXX is a random string and can be ignored.

There are some other values, but these values are the application name which are used by the dialplan.

IAX2/NUM-XXXXXXX: it means this is an IAX call.

Local/@from-internal-XXXXX: it is used internally to do some special feature procedure. We can simply ignore it.

Hangup: the call is hung up from the dialplan. This indicates there are some errors or it has run into abnormal cases.

Playback: play some prompts to you, such as 183 response or run into an IVR.

ReadExten: collect numbers from user. It may occur when you input PIN codes or run into DISA

Note: The language of column titles in exported CDR reports and statistics reports will be based on the UCM’s display language

CDR Export Customization

Users can select the data they want to see in exported CDR reports by first clicking on the Filter button on the CDR page under CDR🡪CDR and selecting the desired information in the Export File Data field.

CDR in GDMS Cloud

Cloud Storage for CDR Record which can be displayed under CDR 🡪 CDR in GDMS Cloud.

Statistics

UCM supports the function of concurrent call statistics. This function provides users with statistics on the number of concurrent calls of all VOIP trunks (SIP trunks and IAX trunks). Users can set search criteria to generate custom charts. Select the trunk and time to view the chart of the maximum number of concurrent calls corresponding to the trunk in a certain day or month.

Trunk Type	Select one of the following trunk type. All SIP Calls PSTN Calls
Call Type	Select one or more in the following checkboxes. Inbound calls Outbound calls Internal calls External calls All calls
Time Range	By month (of the selected year). By week (of the selected year). By day (of the specified month for the year). By hour (of the specified date). By range. For example, 2016-01 To 2016-03.

Recording Files

This page lists all the recording files recorded by “Auto Record” per extension/ring group/call queue/trunk, or via feature code “Audio Mix Record”. If external storage device is plugged in, for example, SD card or USB drive, the files are stored on the external storage. Otherwise, internal storage will be used on the UCM630X.

• Click on “Download” to batch-download the selected recording files.
• Click on “Download All” to download all the recording files.
• Click on “Delete” to batch-delete the selected recording files.
• Click on “Clear” to delete all the recording files.
• Click on “Scan” to retrieve the file information and display all the recording files on external storage. The UCM automatically retrieves the info of the first 5000 files from external storage already. This button can be used when the number of files stored on the external storage exceeds 5000 files and it requires manual file scanning.
• Select either “USB Disk” or “Local” to show recording files stored on external or internal storage, depending on selected storage space.
• Select whether to show call recordings, queue recordings or conference recordings.
• Click on to download the recording file in .wav format.
• Click on to delete the recording file.
• To sort the recording file, click on the title “Caller”, “Callee” or “Call Time” for the corresponding column. Click on the title again can switch the sorting mode between ascending order or descending order.

USER PORTAL

Users could log into their web GUI portal using the extension number and user password. When an extension is created in the UCM630X, the corresponding user account for the extension is automatically created. The user portal allows access to a variety of features which include user information, extension configuration and CDR as well as settings and managing other features like Call Queue, Wakeup Service and CRM.

Users also can access their personal data files (call recordings, Voicemail Prompts …).

The login credentials are configured by Super Admin. The following figure shows the dialog of editing the account information by Super Admin. The Username must be the extension number and it is not configurable, and the password is set on “User Password” field and it should not be confused with the SIP extension password.

The following screenshot shows an example of login page using extension number 1000 as the username.

After login, the Web GUI display is shown as below.

After successful login, the user has the following three configuration tabs:

Basic Information

Under this menu, the user can configure and change his/her personal information including (first name, last name, password, email address, department…). And they can also set and activate their extension features (presence status, call forward, DND ….) to be reflected on the UCM.

Also, the user can see from this menu the Call Details Records and search for specific ones along with the possibility to download the records on CSV format for later usage.

Personal Data

Under this section, the user can access and manage their personal data files which includes (voicemail files, call recordings …) along with the possibility to set Follow me feature to without requesting the Super admin to set the feature from admin account.

Other Features

On this section, the user has access to manage and use all rich features which includes.

+ If user is a member of call queue, they can check the queue’s activity from the “Call Queue” section.

+ Create and enable Wake Up service.

+ Enable and configure CRM connection to either SugarCRM or Salesforce.

For the configuration parameter information in each page, please refer to [User Management🡪Create New User] for options in User Portal🡪Basic Information🡪User Information page; please refer to [EXTENSIONS] for options in User Portal🡪Basic Information🡪Extension page; please refer to [CDR] for User Portal🡪Basic Information🡪CDR page.

MAINTENANCE

User Management

User management is on Web GUI🡪Maintenance🡪User Management page. User could create multiple accounts for different administrators to log in the UCM630X Web GUI. Additionally, the system will automatically create user accounts along with creating new extensions for extension users to login to the Web GUI using their extension number and password. All existing user accounts for Web GUI login will be displayed on User Management page as shown in the following figure.

User Information

When logged in as Super Admin, click on ”Add” to create a new account for Web GUI user. The following dialog will prompt. Configure the parameters as shown in below table.

When the super admin creates new user, the email address for the new user is optional. However, when the admin user created by super admin logs in to edit user information, email address is mandatory. This email address is the same and will be sync up with the email address configured in login settings.

Once created, the Super Admin can edit the users by clicking on or delete the user by clicking on .

Multi-Factor Authentication

To enhance the security for UCM, super admin and admin can select to use multi-factor authentication method for login to protect the login information. Virtual MFA and hardware MFA are supported and can be selected. Once enabled, the user must use MFA code to verify before login.

Note:

• The user cannot enable or disable MFA for another different user.
• Super admin can edit user settings for admin but cannot edit Multi-Factor Authentication option. MFA option is only viewable for super admin when super admin edits other users.
• When the user sees MFA enabled, only this user can disable or enable it again.
• Email address and email settings are required before enabling Multi-Factor Authentication. Please ensure email setting has “Client” type configured. Otherwise, MFA cannot be enabled.

Please refer to MFA how to guide here for more information.

Custom Privilege

Four privilege levels are supported:

• Super Administrator
• This is the highest privilege. Super Admin can access all pages on UCM630X Web GUI, change configuration for all options and execute all the operations.
• Super Admin can create, edit, and delete one or more users with “Admin” privilege
• Super Admin can edit and delete one or more users with “Consumer” privilege
• Super Admin can view operation logs generated by all users.
• By default, the user account “admin” is configured with “Super Admin” privilege and it is the only user with “Super Admin” privilege. The Username and Privilege level cannot be changed or deleted.
• Super Admin could change its own login password on Web GUI🡪Maintenance🡪Login Settings page.
• Super Admin could view operations done by all the users in Web GUI🡪Maintenance🡪User Management🡪Operation Log
• Administrator
• Users with “Admin” privilege can only be created by “Super Admin” user.
• “Admin” privilege users are not allowed to access the following pages:

Maintenance🡪Upgrade

Maintenance🡪Cleaner

Maintenance🡪Reset/Reboot

Settings🡪User Management🡪Operation Log

• “Admin” privilege users cannot create new users for login.

Note: By default, administrator accounts are not allowed to access backup menu, but this can be assigned to them by editing the option “Maintenance 🡪 User Management 🡪 Custom Privilege” then press to edit the “Admin” account and include backup operation permission for these types of users.

• Consumer
• A user account for Web GUI login is created automatically by the system when a new extension is created.
• The user could log in the Web GUI with the extension number and password to access user information, extension configuration, CDR of that extension, personal data, and Other Features. For more details; please refer to https://documentation.grandstream.com/knowledge-base/user-portal/.
• The SuperAdmin user can click on on the “General_User” in order to enable/disable the custom privilege from deleting their own recording files, changing SIP credentials, and disabling voicemail service in their user portal account.

• Custom Privilege

The Super Admin user can create users with different privileges. 33 items are available for privilege customization.

1. API Configuration
2. Backup
3. Callback
4. Call Queue
5. Queue Statistics
6. Queue Recordings
7. CDR Recordings
8. CDR Records
9. CDR Statistics
10. Dial By Name
11. DISA
12. Emergency Calls
13. Event List
14. Extensions
15. Extension Groups
16. Outbound Routes
17. Inbound Routes
18. Fax/T.38
19. Fax Sending
20. Feature Codes
21. IVR
22. Paging/Intercom
23. Parking Lot
24. Pickup Groups
25. PMS – Wakeup Service
26. Ring Groups
27. Restrict Calls
28. SCA
29. Speed Dial
30. System Status
31. System Events
32. LDAP Server
33. Time Settings
34. Multimedia Meeting
35. Voicemail
36. Voice Prompt
37. Schedule Call
38. PMS – Wakeup Service
39. Zero Config
40. Announcement
41. UCM RemoteConnect

Log in UCM630X as super admin and go to Maintenance🡪User Management🡪Custom Privilege, create privilege with customized available modules.

When you add CDR Records and CDR Recording Files custom privileges, additional privileges will appear (All Deletion of CDR and Allow Deletion of DCR Recordings , respectively). This offers more flexibility on the privileges that the admin assigns to the user.

To assign custom privilege to a sub-admin, navigate to UCM Web GUI🡪Maintenance🡪User Management🡪User Information🡪Create New User/Edit Users, select the custom privilege from “Privilege” option.

Concurrent Multi-User Login

When there are multiple Web GUI users created, concurrent multi-user login is supported on the UCM630X. Multiple users could edit options and have configurations take effect simultaneously. However, if different users are editing the same option or making the same operation (by clicking on “Apply Changes”), a prompt will pop up as shown in the following figure.

User Portal/Wave Privilege

The user can create customize privileges related to an extension’s User Portal and Wave. The created privilege can be affected to the extensions to limit or allow them to use certain functionalities related to Wave and the User Portal.

Wave Permissions

• Chat: Toggles ability to use the Wave Chat feature.
  • Delete Chat: Toggles support for Wave to delete chats and chat history. This data will only be deleted on the Wave client side.
  • Send File: Toggles file/image sending support in Wave chat. If disabled, users will still be able to download, view and forward chat files.
• End-to-End Encrypted Chat*: Toggles ability to use the Wave End-to-End Encrypted Chat feature.
• Video Call: Toggles ability to use the Wave Video Call feature.
• Meeting: Toggles ability to use the Wave Meeting feature.
  • Start Video During Meeting: Toggles ability to use the Wave Start During Meeting feature.
• Online Status: Toggles ability to set Wave online status such as “Busy”, “Appear Away”, “Do Not Disturb”, “Appear Offline”, etc. If unchecked, the status will be displayed as only either “Online” or “Idle”.
• Clear Recent Call History: Toggles ability to delete recent call history entries and entire recent call history on Wave.
• Application: Toggles ability to access the “Applications” page under Wave Desktop and Wave Web.
• Smart Devices: Toggling off privileges will hide the corresponding pages and options in Wave.
  • Door System
  • Monitor
  • Call Device (CTI)
• 3rd Party Applications
  • App Store: Toggles ability to access the Wave App Store. If unchecked, the App Store will be hidden, but installed apps can still be used.
  • Pre-installed Apps*: Configure Wave pre-installed add-ins and related settings.

User Portal/Wave Privileges

• Account Settings: If unchecked, the User Portal -> Basic Information -> Account Settings page and the Wave -> Sidebar -> User -> Account Settings option will be hidden.
• Extension Settings: If unchecked, the extension’s User Portal->Basic Information->Extensions page and the Wave->Sidebar->User->Call Settings option will be hidden.
  • Do Not Disturb: Toggles ability to set DND through the User Portal.
  • SIP/IAX Password & AuthID: Toggles ability to access the SIP/IAX Password and AuthID settings under the User Portal->Basic Information->Extensions->Basic Settings page.
  • Configuration Voicemail
• Deleting Recordings: Toggles ability to delete recordings through the User Portal and Wave. For Wave, this includes the ability to delete call logs, meeting details,and recordings.
• Personal Data: Toggling off privileges will hide the corresponding pages and options in the User Portal and Wave.
  • CDR
  • Follow Me
  • Voicemail
  • Recordings files
  • Fax Files
  • SCA
• Other Features: Toggling off privileges will hide the corresponding pages and options in the User Portal and Wave.
  • Fax Sending
  • Call Queue
  • Schedule Call

*: Features which are marked by an asterisk are a part of RemoteConnect plans.

User Endpoint Access History

The User Endpoint Access History tab allows the administrator to view the access history of all extensions, the time on which the access has occurred, the IP addresses from which the extensions were accessed, and whether they were accessed from the User Portal, Wave Web/Desktop, or mobile. Extension access from the SIP endpoints won’t be logged in this page.

Login Settings

Change Password / Email

Change Password

After logging in the UCM630X Web GUI for the first time, it is highly recommended for users to change the default password to a more complicated password for security purpose. Follow the steps below to change the Web GUI access password.

1. Go to Web GUI🡪Maintenance🡪Login Settings🡪Change Password / Email page.
2. Enter the old password first.
3. Enter the new password and re-type the new password to confirm. The new password has to be at least 4 characters. The maximum length of the password is 30 characters.
4. Configure the Email Address that is used when login credential is lost.
5. Click on “Save” and the user will be automatically logged out.
6. Once the web page comes back to the login page again, enter the username “admin” and the new password to login.

Enter Old Password	Enter the Old Password for UCM630X
Change Password	Enable Change Password
Enter New Password	Enter the New Password for UCM630X
Re-enter New Password	Retype the New Password for UCM630X
Change Username	Enable Change Username
Please enter the username	Enter the Username
Email Address	The Email address is the User Email Address. It is used for receiving password information if the user forgets his password.

Change Username

UCM630X allows users now to change Super Administrator username.

Change Email Address

UCM630X allows user to configure binding email in case login password is lost. UCM630X login credential will be sent to the designated email address. The feature can be found under Web GUI🡪 Maintenance🡪Login Settings🡪Change Password / Email

Email Address

Email Address is used to retrieve password when password is lost

Login Security

After the user logs in the UCM630X Web GUI, the user will be automatically logged out after certain timeout, or he/she can be banned for a specific period if the login timeout is exceeded. Those values can be specified under UCM630X web GUI🡪Maintenance🡪Login Settings🡪Login Security page.

The “User Login Timeout” value is in minute and the default setting is 10 minutes. If the user does not make any operation on Web GUI within the timeout, the user will be logged out automatically. After that, the Web GUI will be redirected to the login page and the user will need to enter username and password to log in.

Remote Login

This feature allows the user to manage trusted login locations, also, verifying where login sessions were initiated from, this is very important since, in this type of scenario, the UCM6300 would be directly connected to the Internet, and the public IP address would be used for the remote login. This feature adds a layer of visibility and control, thus enhacing the security of the UCM.

In this tab there are two types of lists of locations:

• Trusted Login Locations: These are the trusted login locations that are added manually by the admin. Any added trusted login location will not generate any remote login alert upon the first time login.
• Other Login Location: This list will show all the remote login locations that are not trusted, logging in for the first time from an untrusted login location will generate an alert, but the subsequent remote logins from the same location will not generate alerts.

To add a trusted login location, the user must click on

Then add the public IP address of the location, click on “Check Location” to verify if it’s the correct location then click “OK“.

Operation Log

Super Admin has the authority to view operation logs on UCM630X Web GUI🡪Settings🡪User Management🡪Operation Log page. Operation logs list operations done by all the Web GUI users, for example, Web GUI login, creating trunk, creating outbound rule etc. There are 7 columns to record the operation details “Date”, “Username”, “IP Address”, “Results”, “Page Operation”, “Specific Operation” and “Remark”.

The operation log can be sorted and filtered for easy access. Click on or at the top of each column to sort. For example, clicking on for “Date” will sort the logs according to newer operation date and time. Clicking on for “Date” will reverse the order.

User could also filter the operation logs by time condition, IP address and/or username. Configure these conditions and then click on ”Display Filter”.

The above figure shows an example that operations made by user “support” on device with IP 192.168.40.173 from 2014-11-01 00:00 to 2014-11-06 15:38 are filtered out and displayed.

To delete operation logs, users can perform filtering first and then click on to delete the filtered result of operation logs. Or users can click on to delete all operation logs at once.

Upgrading

During its lifetime, the UCM6300 Series models will receive regular updates. These updates include new features and functionalities, bug fixes, security patches, and general improvements to the security and performance of the device. It is highly recommended that you keep the firmware of your UCM up to date.

Before proceeding with the firmware upgrade, please visit https://www.grandstream.com/support/firmware and download the latest firmware available for the UCM. Once the file has been download, please decompress the file, you will get a .bin file, that’s the file which will uploaded to the UCM.

To upgrade the firmware of the UCM6300 Series, please access the web UI of the UCM, then navigate to Maintenance → Upgrade

1. Click on “Choose File to Upload” field in front of “Firmware File Path”
2. Use the window to navigate to where the firmware file is located then select it.
3. Once the firmware file has been selected, the file will be uploaded to the UCM and the upgrade will begin.
4. A prompt will appear to reboot the device to finalize the upgrade.

Backup

Backup/Restore

Users could backup the UCM630X configurations for restore purpose under Web GUI🡪Maintenance🡪Backup🡪Backup/Restore.

Click on ”Backup” to create a new backup file. Then the following dialog will show.

1. Choose the type(s) of files to be included in the backup.
2. Choose where to store the backup file: USB Disk, SD Card, Local, NAS, SFTP, or GDMS.
3. Name the backup file.
4. Click on “Backup” to start backup.

Once the backup is done, the list of the backups will be displayed with date and time in the web page. Users can download , restore , or delete it from the UCM630X internal storage or the external device.

Click on to upload backup file from the local device to UCM630X. The uploaded backup file will also be displayed in the web page and can be used to restore the UCM630X.

Please make sure the FXO port settings, total number of extensions and total number of conference rooms are compactable before restoring to another UCM model. Otherwise it will prompt a warning and stop the restore process as shown below:

The option allows UCM to perform automatically backup on the user specified time. Regular backup file can only be stored in USB / SD card / SFTP server. User is allowed to set backup time from 0-23 and how frequent the backup will be performed.

Data Sync

Besides local backup, users could backup the voice records/voice mails/CDR in a daily basis to a remote server via SFTP protocol automatically under Web GUI🡪Maintenance🡪Backup🡪Data Sync.

The client account supports special characters such as @ or “.” Allowing the use email address as SFTP accounts. It allows users as well to specify the destination directory on SFTP server for backup file. If the directory does not exist on the destination, UCM630X will create the directory automatically

Enable Data Sync	Enable the auto data sync function. The default setting is “No”.
Account	Enter the Account name on the SFTP backup server.
Password	Enter the Password associate with the Account on the SFTP backup server.
Server Address	Enter the SFTP server address.
Destination Directory	Specify the directory in SFTP server to keep the backup file. Format: ‘xxx/xxx/xxx’, If this directory does not exist, UCM will create this directory automatically.
Sync Time	Enter 0-23 to specify the backup hour of the day.

Before saving the configuration, users could click on . The UCM630X will then try connecting the server to make sure the server is up and accessible for the UCM630X. Save the changes and all the backup logs will be listed on the web page. After data sync is configured, users could also manually synchronize all data by clicking on instead of waiting for the backup time interval to come.

Restore Configuration from Backup File

To restore the configuration on the UCM630X from a backup file, users could go to Web GUI 🡪 Maintenance 🡪 Backup 🡪 Backup/Restore.

• A list of previous configuration backups is displayed on the web page. Users could click on of the desired backup file and it will be restored to the UCM630X.
• If the backup was stored on GDMS, it will be displayed under Backups GDMS Cloud Storage, that can be restored by clicking on
• If users have other backup files on PC to restore on the UCM630X, click on “Upload Backup File” first and select it from local PC to upload on the UCM630X. Once the uploading is done, this backup file will be displayed in the list of previous configuration backups for restore purpose. Click on to restore from the backup file.

System Cleanup/Reset

Reset and Reboot

Users could perform reset and reboot under Web GUI🡪Maintenance🡪System Cleanup/Reset🡪Reset and Reboot.

• To reboot the device, click on reboot icon.
• To factory reset the device, click on reset icon, then all the configurations and data will be reset to factory default.

• User can also verify UCM certificate under the same path.

Cleaner

Users could configure to clean the Call Detail Report/Voice Records/Voice Mails etc… manually and automatically under Web GUI🡪Maintenance🡪System Cleanup/Reset🡪Cleaner.

The following screenshot show the settings and parameters to configure the manual cleaner feature on UCM630X.

UCM regularly cleans up CDRs, report data, chat data, recording files, historical appointment meeting records, voice mail, backup files, and fax files. The report data includes queue statistics report and conference room call statistics report; chat data includes chat messages and chat shared files; historical appointment conferences include audio and video conference appointment records. Automatic cleanup is not enabled by default and supports regular cleanup of database data based on dimensions such as cleanup time, cleanup conditions, and cleanup interval.

User can also set an automatic cleaning under Cleaner🡪Automatic Cleaning. The following screenshot show the settings and parameters to configure the cleaner feature on UCM630X.

Enable CDR Cleaner	Enable the CDR Cleaner function.
CDR Clean Time	Enter 0-23 to specify the hour of the day to clean up CDR.
Cleaning Conditions	By Schedule: If the clean interval is 3, cleaning will be performed every 3 days to remove all records that were generated 3 days ago. Keep Last X Records: If the max number of CDR has been reached, CDR will be deleted starting with the oldest entry at the configured cleaning time.(Note: The amount of records displayed on the page of call queue statistics is not one-to-one with the actual amount of records in the database.) Keep Last X Days: Delete all entries older than X days.
Clean Interval	Enter 1-30 to specify the day of the month to clean up CDR when By Schedule is selected as Cleaning Conditions.
Max Entries	Set the maximum number of CDR entries to keep when Keep Last X Records is selected as Cleaning Conditions.
Keep Last X Day	Enter the number of days of call log entries to keep when Keep Last X days is selected as Cleaning Conditions.
Enable Report Cleaner	Enable scheduled queue log cleaning. By default, is disabled.
Cleanup Type	Queue Statistics Report Meeting Call Statistics Report Scheduled Audio Meeting History Scheduled Video Meeting History
Clean Time	Enter the hour of the day to start the cleaning. The valid range is 0-23.
Cleaning Conditions	By Schedule: If the clean interval is 3, cleaning will be performed every 3 days to remove all records that were generated 3 days ago. Keep Last X Records: If the max number of Queue Statistics has been reached, Queue Statistics will be deleted starting with the oldest entry at the configured cleaning time.(Note: The amount of records displayed on the page of call queue statistics is not one-to-one with the actual amount of records in the database.) Keep Last X Days: Delete all entries older than X days.
Clean Interval	Enter how often (in days) to clean queue logs when By Schedule is selected as Cleaning Conditions. The valid range is 1-30.
Max Entries	Set the maximum number of Queue Statistics entries to keep when Keep Last X Records is selected as Cleaning Conditions.
Keep Last X Day	Enter the number of days of call log entries to keep when Keep Last X days is selected as Cleaning Conditions.
Enable Conference Statistics Report Cleaner	Enable scheduled Conference log cleaning. By default, is disabled.
Cleaning Conditions	By Schedule: If the clean interval is 3, cleaning will be performed every 3 days to remove all records that were generated 3 days ago. Keep Last X Records: If the max number of Conference Statistics Report has been reached, Conference Statistics Report will be deleted starting with the oldest entry at the configured cleaning time. (Note: The amount of records displayed on the page of call queue statistics is not one-to-one with the actual amount of records in the database.) Keep Last X Days: Delete all entries older than X days.
Clean Interval	Enter how often (in days) to clean queue logs when By Schedule is selected as Cleaning Conditions. The valid range is 1-30.
Max Entries	Set the maximum number of Conference Statistics Report entries to keep when Keep Last X Records is selected as Cleaning Conditions.
Keep Last X Day	Enter the number of days of call log entries to keep when Keep Last X days is selected as Cleaning Conditions.
Enable File Cleaner	Enter the Voice Records Cleaner function.
Clean Files in External Device	If enabled the files in external device (USB/SD card) will be atomically cleaned up as configured.
Choose Cleaner File	Select the files for system automatic clean. Basic Call Recording Files. Conference Recording Files. Call Queue Recording Files. Voicemail Files. Backup Files.
Clean time	Enter the hour of the day to start the cleaning. The valid range is 0-23.
Cleaning Conditions	By Schedule: If the clean interval is 3, cleaning will be performed every 3 days to delete all files. By Threshold: Check at the configured cleaning time every day to see if the storage threshold has been exceeded and perform cleaning of all files if it has. Keep Last X Days: Delete all files older than X days.
File Clean Interval	Enter 1-30 to specify the day of the month to clean up the files.
File Clean Threshold	Enter the internal storage disk usage threshold (in percent). Once this threshold is exceeded, the file cleanup will proceed as scheduled. Valid range is 0-99.
Keep Last X Days	Automatically delete all recordings older than this x days when the threshold is reached. If not set, all data is cleared
Cleaner Log	Press Clean “button” to clean the cleaner’s log.

All the cleaner logs will be listed on the bottom of the page.

USB/SD Card Files Cleanup

Users could configure to clean or download the Call Detail Report/Voice Records/Voice Mails automatically under Web GUI🡪Maintenance🡪System Cleanup/Reset🡪USB / SD Card Files Cleanup.

Current Path	Displays the current path.
Directory	Select the directory user want to clean.
Delete Selected File	Select multiple entries to delete from USB or SD card.

System Recovery

In some cases (for example after wrong upgrading procedure where the user doesn’t follow the correct steps to perform an upgrade) the system may go into some hardware/software issues where the web UI access is lost as well as SSH, in this case the only solution would be to perform a full system recovery in order to reset or update the software version of the device in order to use it again.

1. To access recovery mode on UCM, please follow below steps:
2. Remove the power from the unit and keep the network cable connected.
3. Press using a PIN the reset button and keep holding.
4. Plug back the power supply while maintaining the reset button pressed.
5. Wait for couple of seconds until you hear a click sound.
6. Release the reset button, and the system should display on the LCD a message “Recovery Mode” along with an IP address.

Once at this stage, the administrator can access the recovery mode web portal by typing in either the IP0 address (typically WAN) or IP1 address (typically LAN) into a browser address bar. The following page should appear:

Make sure to enter the correct admin password, and press login to access the recovery mode page :

From here, the user can either upload a firmware file, factory reset or just reboot the device.

Syslog

On the UCM630X, users could dump the syslog information to a remote server under Web GUI🡪Maintenance🡪Syslog. Enter the syslog server hostname or IP address and select the module/level for the syslog information as well as Process Log Level.

The default syslog level for all modules is “error”, which is recommended in your UCM630X settings because it can be helpful to locate the issues when errors happen.

Some typical modules for UCM630X functions are as follows and users can turn on “NOTICE” and “VERBOSE” levels besides “error” level.

• pbx: This module is related to general PBX functions.
• pjsip: This module is related to SIP calls.
• chan_dahdi: This module is related to analog calls (FXO/FXS).

Network Troubleshooting

On the UCM630X, users could capture traces, ping remote host and traceroute remote host for troubleshooting purpose under Web GUI🡪Maintenance🡪Network Troubleshooting.

The following sections shows the steps to capture different types of traffic traces for analysis purposes.

Ethernet Capture

Ethernet Capture allows capturing the traffic of the UCM for troubleshooting purposes. To access Ethernet Capture feature, please navigate to Maintenance → Network Troubleshooting → Ethernet Capture

The capture packets can be stored locally and downloaded for analysis. However, if the user is diagnosing a randomly-occurring issue, he/she can run a continuous packet capture which can be limited by the size of the packet capture and the number of packet capture instances

The output result is in .pcap format. Therefore, users could specify the capture filter as used in general network traffic capture tool (host, src, dst, net, protocol, port, port range) before starting to capture the trace.

IP Ping

Enter the target host in host name or IP address. Then press “Start” button. The output result will dynamically display in the window below.

Traceroute

Enter the target host in host name or IP address. Then press “Start” button. The output result will dynamically display in the window below.

Record Meeting for Diagnosis

Enter the target meeting, support the ongoing meeting, and then click the “Start” button to capture the recording diagnosis of the meeting members in progress. The output result will be automatically displayed below, click the “download” button to download to the local. After the download is complete, immediately click the “Delete” button to clear the system content.

Signaling Troubleshooting

Analog Record Trace

• Analog Record Trace

Analog record trace can be used to troubleshoot analog trunk issue, for example, the UCM630X user has caller ID issue for incoming call from Analog trunk. Users can access analog record trance under Web GUI🡪Maintenance🡪Signal Troubleshooting.

Here is the step to capture trace:

1. Select FXO or FXS for “Record Ports”. If the issue happens on FXO 1, select FXO port 1 to record the trace.
2. Click on “Start”.
3. Make a call via the analog port that has the issue.
4. Once done, click on “Stop”.
5. Click on “Download” to download the analog record trace.

• A key Dial-up FXO

Users can directly set a PSTN number on the “External Extension” text box to troubleshoot issues related to the analog trunk easily, the following steps shows how to use this feature:

1. Configure analog trunk on UCM, including outbound route.
2. Enter a reachable external number in “External Extension”.
3. Press “Start” button. The call will be initiated to the external number.
4. Answer and finish the call before pressing “Stop” button.

The trace will be available for analysis to download after output result shows “Done! Click on Download to download the captured packets”.

After capturing the trace, users can download it for basic analysis. Or you can contact Grandstream

Technical support in the following link for further assistance if the issue is not resolved.

https://helpdesk.grandstream.com/

Service Check

Enable Service Check to periodically check UCM630X. Check Cycle is configurable in seconds and the default setting is 60 sec. Check Times is the maximum number of failed checks before restart the UCM630X. The default setting is 3. If there is no response from UCM630X after 3 attempts (default) to check, current status will be stored and the internal service in UCM630X will be restarted.

Network Status

In UCM630X Web GUI🡪System Status🡪Network Status, the users can view active Internet connections. This information can be used to troubleshoot connection issue between UCM630X and other services.

APPENDIX A: RFC STANDARDS USED IN UCM6300 SERIES

• RFC 3261 SIP: Session Initiation Protocol
• RFC 3262 Reliability of Provisional Responses in SIP
• RFC 3263 Session Initiation Protocol (SIP): Locating SIP Servers
• RFC 3264 An Offer/Answer Model with the Session Description Protocol
• RFC 3515 The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Refer Method
• RFC 3311 The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) UPDATE Method
• RFC 4028 Session Timers in the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
• RFC 2976 The SIP INFO Method
• RFC 3842 A Message Summary and Message Waiting Indication Event Package for the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
• RFC 3892 The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Referred-By Mechanism
• RFC 3428 Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Extension for Instant Messaging
• RFC 4733 RTP Payload for DTMF Digits, Telephony Tones, and Telephony Signals
• RFC 4566 SDP: Session Description Protocol
• RFC 2617 HTTP Authentication; Basic and Digest Access Authentication
• RFC 3856 A Presence Event Package for the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
• RFC 3711 The Secure Real-time Transport Protocol (SRTP)
• RFC 4582 The Binary Floor Control Protocol (BFCP)
• RFC 4583 Session Description Protocol (SDP) Format for Binary Floor Control Protocol (BFCP) Streams
• RFC 5245 Interactive Connectivity Establishment (ICE): A Protocol for Network Address Translator (NAT) Traversal for Offer/Answer Protocols
• RFC 5389 Session Traversal Utilities for NAT (STUN)
• RFC 5766 Traversal Using Relays around NAT (TURN): Relay Extensions to Session Traversal Utilities for NAT (STUN)
• RFC 6347 Datagram Transport Layer Security Version 1.2
• RFC 6455 The WebSocket Protocol
• RFC 8860 Sending Multiple Types of Media in a Single RTP Session
• RFC 4734 Definition of Events for Modem, Fax, and Text Telephony Signals
• RFC 3665 Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Basic Call Flow Examples
• RFC 3323 A Privacy Mechanism for the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
• RFC 3550 RTP: A Transport Protocol for Real-Time Applications

CHANGELOG

This section documents significant changes from previous versions of the UCM630X user manuals. Only major new features or major document updates are listed here. Minor updates for corrections or editing are not documented here.

Firmware Version 1.0.25.7

• Added support for media resource clustering for UCM6304 and UCM6308. [Cluster]
• Multicast Community has been added. [Multicast Community]
• Scheduled Paging UI has been reworked. [Scheduled Paging/Intercom]
• Added support for playing MP3 files over GSC35XX devices. [Upload Custom Prompt]
• Added support for PMS billing system for Local PMS. [Call Rate]
• Mini bar has been improved. [Mini Bar]
• Added ability to set a Feature Code as a the Default Destination. [Speed Dial]
• Added ability to add External Number and LDAP numbers on Announcement Center. [Announcement Center]
• Added Fax Sending privilege when creating custom privileges. [Custom Privilege]
• Added enabling TURN Relay for a specific extension. [Create New SIP Extension]
• HA Data Sync Failure alert event has been added to the Alert Events List. [Alert Events List]
• SIP endpoints firmware can now be updated using the Zero Config page. [Managing Discovered Devices]
• Clearing the call history upon guest check-in or check-out has been added. [Local PMS]
• Onsite Meetings email invitations will include now an ics file. [Onsite Meeting]
• “Send File” Wave privilege has been added. [User Portal/Wave Privilege]

Firmware Version 1.0.23.17

• No major change.

Firmware Version 1.0.23.15

• Increased Fail2Ban list limit to 50 entries. [Fail2ban]
• NAS password field now supports special characters “&$’^`>|, [NAS]
• Speed Dial limit has been increased to 1000. [Speed Dial]

Firmware Version 1.0.23.12

• Added support for limiting chat history viewing for newly added participants. [Meetings Settings]
• Added support for including company number when scheduling a meeting. [Meetings Schedule]
• Added support for tracking outbound calls for QueueMetrics. [QueueMetrics]
• Added support for displaying call queue names on GRP phones.
• Added support for auto answer on inbound route level to detect fax call. [Inbound Rule Configurations]
• Added support for updating the call forwarding status when enabled via feature code. [Feature Codes]
• Added support for controlling diversion header. [SIP Settings]
• Added “Extension Group” as a custom privilege. [Custom Privilege]
• Added ability to retrieve recording files saved on NAS/GDMS cloud through API.
• Added support for manually backing up the UCM configuration to SFTP. [Backup/Restore]
• Added disaster recovery for High Availability. [HA]
• Added feature code to blacklist last called number. [Feature Codes]
• Added ability to share voicemail to group members. [VOICEMAIL]
• Added ability to delete voicemails for all voicemail group from one member. [VOICEMAIL]
• Added ability to monitor voicemail groups with voicemail key on endpoints. [VOICEMAIL]
• Added “Ignore Safe Operational Flow” to Network Port Traffic Control. [Network Settings]
• Added support for domains in API ACL.
• Added support for configuring chat file size limit. [IM Settings]
• Added support for “announce message caller-ID” in Announcement Center. [Announcement Center Settings]
• Added support for preventing Wave chat deletion. [User Portal/Wave Privilege]
• Added “Priority Call” feature code. [Feature Codes]
• Added support for updating time zones under Time Settings. [Time Settings]
• Added Live Chat feature. [Live Chat]
• Added Message Broadcast feature. [Message Broadcast]

Firmware Version 1.0.21.9

• Added SMS service support. [SMS Settings]
• Added support for creating shared departments. [Department Management]
• Added support for RADIUS login. [RADIUS]
• Added support for private intercom. [Configure Private Intercom]
• Added support for setting an extension as the default destination in Click2call. [Integrated Customer Service]
• Added support for SIP TLS cipher suite. [TCP & TLS]
• Added size and packet number limit for continuous packet capture when using USB/SD card storage or SFTP. [Ethernet Capture]
• Added support for resetting TLS certifcates to the default ones. [TCP & TLS]
• Added support for SSH token. [SSH Access]
• Added support for subscribing to a voicemail group. [Configure Voicemail Group]
• Added support for setting separate call forwarding conditions for external and internal calls. [Create New SIP Extension]
• Added support for forwarding calls to a custom prompt. [Create New SIP Extension]
• Added support for external numbers to opt out of being recorded when calling into the UCM. [PBX Settings]
• Added support for caller name look up. [Inbound Routes]
• The name of the agent will now be displayed in the switchboard. [Switchboard]
• Agent pause can now be performed quickly by dialing the respective feature code and the corresponding pause reason without having to interact with the IVR. [Configure Call Queue]
• Agent pause reason will now be displayed in the switchboard. [Switchboard]
• Added support for enabling the welcome prompt to be played simultaneously with background music while the agent phone is ringing. [Configure Call Queue]

Firmware Version 1.0.19.10

• Specific time configuration is now included in extension exports

Firmware Version 1.0.19.9

• Optimized various system processes
• Added Onsite Meetings feature. [Onsite Meeting]
• Added ability to customize extension call waiting tone [General Call Prompt Tones]
• {VM_DATE} date value format has been changed to MM/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss from DDD yyyy MMM hh:mm:ss. [Configure Fax/T.38] [Voicemail Email Settings]
• Added Device Name ${DEVICE_NAME} variable to Alert Events and Emergency Calls email templates
• Added Geolocation header support [Emergency Location Mapping]
• Added P-Called-Party-ID header option to the Add/Edit Extension -> Features page [Create New SIP Extension]
• Added Allow Operator Panel Monitoring extension option to toggle whether the Operator Panel can monitor the extension. [Create New SIP Extension]
• Added Basic extension export option [Export Extensions]
• Allow Call-barging Extension List option changed to Call Monitoring Whitelist [Create New SIP Extensions] [Create New IAX Extension]
• Added Silence Suppression option to Extensions/VoIP Trunks page [Create New SIP Extension] [VoIP Trunk Configuration]
• If a storage device is full, the UCM will mark it as unavailable and automatically change file storage path to the next available location based on the Storage Path Priority. Previously, UCM would change the file storage path to its own local storage if external storage was full. [File Manager]
• Added new commands related to call queue and Wave [API Configuration Parameters]
• Added support for multiple API (new) users [API Configuration Parameters]
• Added the Default Certificate Auto Renewal option. If enabled, the default browser certificate will be automatically renewed after 398 days (the max certificate validity period of Chrome, Firefox, and Safari browsers). User-defined certificates are not affected. [HTTP Server]
• Added ability to sync local IM data to Cloud IM [Cloud IM Service]
• Added ability create custom IVR key presses [Custom Key Event]
• Added Chat Data from Endpoint option to the Maintenance -> System Cleanup/Reset -> Cleaner page. If enabled, this option will clean out chat data from Wave clients at the same time as the UCM’s server-side automatic/manual cleaning of chat data. [Cleaner]
• Added support for meeting room passwords. However, meetings cannot be scheduled for rooms with meeting password enabled. [Multimedia Room Configurations]
• Meeting kick warning interval has been changed from 30 mins to 20 mins. Note: This kick warning will only play when there is only 1 person in a meeting room, and if they do not opt to stay in the meeting room after the warning, they will be removed from the meeting room after 5 minutes.
• ARP will now be used instead of ping to check NAS connectivity.
• Upgrade logs will now contain firmware version information.
• Queue chairmen can now log out dynamic agents
• Added video paging support. [Configure 1-way Paging]
• Added option to automatically reset user/Wave password upon check-in/check-out. [Local PMS]
• Added option to clear Wave chat history automatically upon check-in or check-out. [Local PMS]
• Added Local PMS functionality [Local PMS]
• Check-out will no longer reset the “Skip Voicemail Password Verification” extension setting
• Added ability to assign two extensions to a room [Room Management]
• Added option to clear scheduled wakeup calls on both check-in and check-out. [Local PMS]
• Added the ability to change the default call privilege of a room. A room’s privilege will be reset to this value after a guest checks out of it.
• Added support for stereo audio recording [General Settings]
• Added option to route calls based on a caller’s Diversion header value [Inbound Rule Configuration]
• Added ability to control whether to use failover trunks based on the call response codes [Failover Trunk Toggles]
• Added support for H.264 with multiple payload types in SDP
• When receiving an INVITE with no SDP, following INVITEs with SDP will offer H.264 1080p resolution by default.
• In the scenario where an inbound external call is forwarded from an extension to an external number, the Contact header will now use the CID of the forwarding extension instead of the caller’s CID.
• Removed External Device Usage Threshold option. If a connected NAS has only 1GB remaining available storage space, it will be considered unavailable and trigger the external disk usage alert. [NAS]
• Added User Endpoint Access History page [User Endpoint Access History]
• Added User Portal/Wave privilege control [User Portal/Wave Privilege]
• Dial Trunk option has been renamed to Dial External Number and moved to the Dial Other Extensions section
• The Wave Welcome email will now use the port number configured in System Settings->HTTP Server->Wave Settings->Port if the Wave Settings->External Host value is not a RemoteConnect address or does not contain a port number.
• Added links to relevant online documentation to various pages of the UCM webUI.
• Added Phonebook VMPK mode to GRP261x template
• Added Firmware tab for improved firmware management [Firmware]
• Added ability delete downloaded base model templates in the Model Update page
• Added ability to search for templates via the device model name
• Added ability to select either LAN1 or LAN2 to scan for devices on when using dual network method

Firmware Version 1.0.17.11

• Several system process optimizations

Firmware Version 1.0.17.8

• Updated python version to 3.8 and related processes.
• Improved speed of applying changes
• Updated lighttpd version to 1.4.61
• The Privilege Name field now supports parenthesis ()
• The Contacts page has been moved to its own category in the sidebar
• Added Channel Path option for accessing specific IP camera channels via URL [Device Management]
• Improved alert email sending process
• Updated Remote Registration email template
• Emergency calls will no longer be restricted by the RemoteConnect call limit.
• The default highest priority codec is now G.722.
• Added Remote Extension Privilege Update feature code and Remote Extension Privilege Update Whitelist field to allow specified users to remotely change extensions’ privileges. [Feature Codes]
• Automatic file migration after file storage path failure to the next storage location in the storage priority path.
• Users can now customize the storage path priority for recordings, video recordings, and IM files. [File Manager]
• FXO FSK CID detection now uses spandsp.
• If SIP extensions synced from UCMs are deleted on GDMS, they will no longer be synced again.
• If HA is enabled, the HA cluster IP address will now be provisioned as the config server to endpoints instead of the active UCM’s IP address.
• Added support for configuring inbound route blacklist via HTTPS API.
• If dialing into a Dial by Name directory, the call will end automatically after failing 3 times.
• Added Server Type option to the LDAP Server→LDAP Phonebook→Phonebook Download Configurations page. Users can select between LDAP and Active Directory. [LDAP Server]
• Added Department field to LDAP phonebook contacts. [LDAP Server]
• Added meeting room extensions to LDAP phonebooks. [LDAP Server]
• External Contacts created from the Contacts page will now be added to the system’s internal LDAP phonebook. [LDAP Server]
• Added Remote Login tab to the Maintenance→Login Settings page. [Maintenance]
• Created new Meetings Settings page under the Multimedia Meetings page and moved several meeting-related options to it. [Multimedia Meeting]
• Regular meeting participants can now invite other members to join the meeting by dialing 1 if “Allow User Invite” is enabled. [Multimedia Meeting]
• Meetings will become “Pending” after rescheduling.
• Pending meetings are now sorted by start time by default.
• Added the Allowed to Override Host Mute option to the Edit Meeting Room and Schedule Meeting pages to allow participants to unmute themselves even after the meeting host mutes them. [Multimedia Meeting]
• Added support for user authentication. [OpenVPN]
• Operation Log entries will now contain the IP address and location information from which the operation originated. [Operation Log]
• Added option Automatically Clear Wakeup Calls for deleting scheduled wakeup calls after either guest check-in and check-out. [PMS Features]
• Users can now dial the Update PMS Room Status feature code, the maid code, and the room status code all at once to change room status. [PMS Features]
• Added a Scan button to manually retrieve the list of recordings on external storage. The UCM automatically displays up to 5000 recordings on attached external storage, but pressing this button will allow the UCM to display more. [Recordings Files]
• Added ability to batch delete cloud storage files.
• If IP endpoints cannot connect to the GDMS TURN server via UDP, UCM will use TCP to connect them.
• Added Trunk Registration Period (s) option to SIP Settings->Misc. [SIP Settings]
• Added option Special Attributes to the Extension/Trunk→VoIP Trunks→Edit SIP Trunk→Advanced Settings page. If enabled, the following attributes will be included in the SIP SDP: ssrc, msid, mid, ct, as, tias, record. Enabling this may cause compatibility issues with non-Grandstream devices. [VoIP Trunk Configuration]
• Added CEI msid for audio calls.
• Added trickle-ice param to SIP OPTION’s 200 OK.
• profile-level-id will be added to 200 OK when receiving INVITEs without SDP.
• Added ability to import/export speed dials. [Speed Dial]
• Improved processes to avoid duplicate alerts for the following events: Registered SIP Trunk failed, Local Disk Usage and External Disk Usage.
• Separated Allow Deletion of CDR and Recordings option to Allow Deletion of CDR and Allow Deletion of CDR Recordings. [User Management]
• Added the Call Waiting option to the User Portal.
• Added support for voicemail message seeking. When listening to voicemail, users can press star (*) to rewind 3 seconds or pound (#) to fast forward 3 seconds. [Voicemail]
• Added Line Selection Strategy option for Trunk Groups. [VoIP Trunks]
• Changed register trunk Username field name to Trunk Registration Number. [VoIP Trunks]
• General web UI improvements
• Added Help option under the username dropdown menu that will redirect to the UCM6300 Series FAQ.
• Updated some tooltips.
• Optimized search functionality
• Added GMT+2:00 (Israel) option to Time Zone drop down list in all Zero Config pages.
• Added support for WP22 and WP825 model templates.

Firmware Version 1.0.15.13

• Added SNMP monitoring feature. [SNMP]
• Added support to configure the time of a holiday. [Holiday]
• Added ability to determine the maximum total call duration per trunk for outbound calls.
• Added contact viewing privilege (independent from Department Contact Privilege). [Contacts]
• Added support for agent ID announcement. [Call Queue]
• Added support for Service Level Agreement for Call Queue. [Service Level Agreement]
• Added support for changing the Meeting room’s name.
• Added WebRTC Trunk feature. [WebRTC Trunks]
• Extension data cleaning has been improved. [Search and Edit an Extension]
• Added support for SRTP Crypto Suite. [Create New SIP Extension]
• STIR/SHAKEN has been improved. [STIR/SHAKEN]
• Added support for displaying the extension that initiated an emergency call in the emergency email notification.
• Added support for collecting ICE candidates when an RTP connection is requested. [RTP Settings]
• Added support for recording a Multimedia Meeting shared screen only with the audio of the participants.
• Flood Attacks and Network Traffic Storm alerts have been added to the Alert Events List.
• Added support for Network Port Traffic Control for the ports of the UCM63xx.
• Added Support for limiting the frequency of calls that can be made in a period of time.
• Added support for storing the local chat files in the GDMS.
• UCM RemoteConnect plan expiry screen has been improved.
• GDMS Cloud Storage Space details can now be viewed in the RemoteConnect menu.

Firmware Version 1.0.13.9

• Added option to enable/disable DND status remotely for an extension. [CALL FEATURES]
• Added local proxy in IM settings. [Cloud IM]
• Added support for enabling/disabling auto audio/video recording for meeting. [Multimedia Meeting Configurations]
• Added privilege management for contacts. [Privilege Management]
• Improved fail2ban blacklist display. [Blacklist]
• Improved email template for scheduling meeting. [Email Templates]
• Contacts sync-up between UCM and end points (wave/IP phones). [LDAP Settings]

• Added ability to specify DOD number based on outbound route. [Outbound Routes DOD]
• Fixed an issue where updating model templates will result in deleting the existing ones.
• Added support to use TURN Relay as an option to allow hosts behind NAT firewalls to communicate. [VoIP Trunk Configuration]

Firmware Version 1.0.11.10

• Combined audio meeting and video meeting to multi-media meeting. [MULTIMEDIA MEETING]
• Updated UCM6301 public meeting room number from 3 to 4. [MULTIMEDIA MEETING]
• Added operator panel. [OPERATOR PANEL]
• Added time condition support for IVR key events. [Key Press Event]
• Supported adding comments for fail2ban whitelist. [Fail2Ban Whitelist]
• Added Call Flip feature code. [Call Flip]
• Added cloud IM abnormal alert event. [Cloud IM abnormal]
• Added option “Play Follow Me Prompt”. [Play Follow Me Prompt]
• Add option “Ignore 180 Response”. [Ignore 180 Response]
• Added Multi-Factor Authentication for UCM login. [Multi-Factor Authentication]
• Added support for IoT device management. [DEVICE MANAGEMENT]
• Added remark for UCM system status. [Remark]
• Added option to enable and disable passwordless for remote access. [UCM RemoteConnect Plan Settings]
• Added option to enable and disable virtual queue call back keys settings. [Virtual Queue Callback Key]
• Added option to enable IPv6 for HA settings. [Enable IPv6]
• Added Address Book Management section. [Address Book Management]
• Added option “Stop Ringing”. [Stop Ringing]
• Add option “Email Missed Call Log”. [Email Missed Call Log]
• Add option “Security Mode” for NAS settings. [Security Mode]
• Removed display for consumer users on the user management page. [Create New User]

Firmware Version 1.0.9.10

• Added support for import/export Zero Config. [Figure 68: Global Policy Categories]
• Added support for Enable Wave and Sync Contact under the extension. [Enable Wave][Sync Contact]
• Added support for Custom time supplement time conditions. [Time Condition]
• Added support for Call Restriction. [RESTRICT CALLS]
• Added support for QueueMetrics. [QUEUEMETRICS]
• Added support for CDR API whitelist. [API Configuration Parameters]
• Added support for Call queue satisfaction survey. [Call Queue Statistics]
• The old API Configuration is reopened for use.
• Custom permissions support the function of deleting CDR and recording files. [delete CDR and recording files]
• Added support to adjust the recording file storage path. [File Manager]
• High Availability feature on UCM6300 series. [HA]
• Paging/Intercom supports delayed paging. [Configure Multicast Paging]
• UCMRC remote service diagnosis. [RemoteConnect]
• Support LDAP to automatically update the phone book. [LDAP Client Configurations]
• Support meeting room automatic gain control. [Meeting Settings]

Firmware Version 1.0.7.12

• Added support for an email reminder when editing the time of a scheduled meeting. [Email Reminder (m)]
• Improved extension status syncing process to the IM server.

Firmware Version 1.0.7.9

• Statistics and alarm settings of the maximum number of concurrent calls on the trunk. [Enable Concurrent Call Alert] [Enable Concurrent Call Alert]
• Add ability to enable/disable Ring Group Voicemail and make Ring Group Voicemail have configurable voicemail prompts. [Voicemail]
• Add ability to import/export pickup groups and time settings. [PICKUP GROUPS]
• Add option to set a holiday as fixed. [Year]
• Support DOD digit manipulation based on extension. [Direct Outward Dialing (DOD)]
• Support to join the scheduled meeting 10 minutes in advance and is controlled by conference resources. [Meeting Schedule]
• Clean up the history of audio and video schedule meetings regularly. [Cleanup Type]
• Record the actual member information in the meeting history details.
• Support to initiate a random meeting in a scheduled/instant-meeting room. [Meeting Schedule]
• The host password for the scheduled meeting is randomly generated. [Meeting Schedule]
• Add the “Download Client” link to the extension email template and add the Wave promotion guide in the setup wizard. [Email Templates] [Setup Wizard]
• Added support for Integrated Customer Service SDK. [Integrated Customer Service SDK]
• Support customer service system call (Click2Call) service provides SDK download for customers to integrate into the website and set up security defense Fail2ban. [Customer Service System Call Defense]
• Support to use Cloud IM service. [IM]
• Add email reminder configuration in the audio meeting room. [Email Reminder (m)]
• Added support for custom prompts under Voicemail Group. [Busy Prompt][Greet Prompt][Temporary Prompt][Unavailable Prompt]
• The dashboard shows eMMC lifetime and the number of public/random video meetings. [PBX Status]
• Added some System Alert Events. [Alert Events List]

Firmware Version 1.0.5.4

• Added support for v-Fax, Fax-sending, Email2Fax. [FAX SERVER]
• Added ability to restore backups remotely stored on GDMS [Restore Configuration from Backup File]
• Added support for STIR/SHAKEN. [SIP Settings/STIR/SHAKEN] [VoIP Trunk Configuration]
• Added ability to restrict calls and features based on CPU usage and data partition usage. [General Settings]
• Added NAT option to the Export File Data filtering option. [Export File Data]
• Wave desktop client is now supported. [Wave Desktop]
• Added support for IAX. [IAX SETTINGS] [EXTENSIONS] [VoIP Trunk Configuration]
• Improved audio and video conference pages. A list of the meetings that have not started and a meeting history list have been added. [Meeting Schedule]
• Support sending post-meeting reports to the host after scheduling a meeting. [Meeting Schedule]
• Added the SRTP Debugging option to the Ethernet Capture page. [Enable SRTP Debugging]
• Updated the System Cleanup/Reset page interface. [System Cleanup/Reset]
• Added manual cleaning. [Cleaner]
• Added ability to add a custom browser tab icon and custom logos on various pages of the web management portal and Wave Web portal. [UI Customization]
• Improved push notification for Wave mobile.
• Added Instant Messaging functionality to Wave Web. [Wave Web]
• LDAP phonebook information will now be synchronized when viewing the Contacts page. [Wave Web]
• UCM can now synchronize system event alerts to GDMS. [Plan Settings]
• Added threshold-based Call Control & Data Write Control. [General Settings]
• Added Layer 3 QoS for SIP and Layer 3 QoS for RTP options to global policy and relevant templates. [Layer 3 QoS For RTP] [Layer 3 QoS For SIP]
• Improved device list import support and added the ability to export devices on the ZeroConfig Device List page. [Managing Discovered Devices]

Firmware Version 1.0.3.10

• Added RemoteConnect Mode option in SIP trunk. [RemoteConnect Mode]
• Cloud Storage for CDR Backup and Record. [CDR in GDMS Cloud]
• Add support for IDS PMS interface. [IDS PMS]
• Add ability to enable PMS Wakeup call from remote extensions. [PMS Remote Wakeup Service]
• Add ability to configure local country code for an outbound route. [Local Country Code]
• Add support for Pattern and Leading digit filtering options in Callee Number. [Callee Number]
• Added description of SSH switch options in LCD menu. [Use the LCD Menu]
• Add the ability to import/export DOD. [Direct Outward Dialing (DOD)]
• Add the ability to enable auto record per inbound/outbound route. [Auto Record] [Auto Record]
• Add the ability to Enable Recording Whitelist. [Enable Recording Whitelist]
• Add the ability to select missed call type to be sent via email. [Missed Call Type]
• The Filter action is now supported in AMI sessions. [ASTERISK MANAGER INTERFACE]
• Added command to delete call recordings after downloading them. [recapi]
• Added commands to add, edit, and delete PIN groups. [addPinSets] [getPinSets] [updatePinSets] [deletePinSets]
• Added External Disk Status alert event for monitoring external storage connection status. [Alert Events List]
• The language of column titles in exported CDR reports and statistics reports will now be based on the UCM’s display language. [Downloaded CDR File]
• Added Parking Lot Timeout Alert-Info option. This will add the specified alert-info header value to parking timeout callbacks. [Parking Lot Timeout Alert-Info]
• Updated HMobile check-in request format. [HMobile PMS Connector]
• Updated HMobile Mini Bar request. [HMobile PMS Connector]
• Added several updates to HSC PMS. [HSC PMS]
• Added the ability to specify the reason for agent pause (*83 by default). [Agent Pause]
• Added CDR Stored in GDMS Cloud option for RemoteConnect Plan Settings. [UCM RemoteConnect]
• GDMS Cloud Storage has been added as a recording storage location in the PBX. [PBX Settings/]
• After adding a UCM to GDMS, its RemoteConnect address will automatically be added as a SIP server to the GDMS account. [UCM RemoteConnect]
• Added the Ringback Tone option. Users can now select a custom prompt to play as a ringback tone for callers dialing in via the selected inbound route. [Ringback tone]
• Ring Group Voicemail can now be set as a routing destination and an IVR key press destination. [Default Destination]
• Added the following custom privileges: LDAP Server, UCM RemoteConnect, and Announcement. [Custom Privilege]
• Added a Forgot Password option to the Wave Web login page. [Wave Web]
• Added a new command to set the same-day wakeup service by dialing *36. [Wakeup Service]

Firmware Version 1.0.2.25

• This is the initial version.